Download Samsung SMART CAMERA SH100 راهنمای محصول

page
1
page
2
page
3
page
4
page
5
page
6
page
7
page
8
page
9
page
10
page
11
page
12
page
13
page
14
page
15
page
16
page
17
page
18
page
19
page
20
page
21
page
22
page
23
page
24
page
25
page
26
page
27
page
28
page
29
page
30
page
31
page
32
page
33
page
34
page
35
page
36
page
37
page
38
page
39
page
40
page
41
page
42
page
43
page
44
page
45
page
46
page
47
page
48
page
49
page
50
page
51
page
52
page
53
page
54
page
55
page
56
page
57
page
58
page
59
page
60
page
61
page
62
page
63
page
64
page
65
page
66
page
67
page
68
page
69
page
70
page
71
page
72
page
73
page
74
page
75
page
76
page
77
page
78
page
79
page
80
page
81
page
82
page
83
page
84
page
85
page
86
page
87
page
88
page
89
page
90
page
91
page
92
page
93
page
94
page
95
page
96
page
97
page
98
page
99
page
100
page
101
page
102
page
103
page
104
page
105
page
106
page
107
page
108
page
109
page
110
page
111
page
112
page
113
page
114
page
115
page
116
page
117
page
118
page
119
page
120
page
121
page
122
page
123
page
124
page
125
page
126
page
127
page
128
page
129
page
130
page
131
page
132
page
133
page
134
page
135
page
136
page
137
page
138
page
139
page
140
page
141
page
142
page
143
page
144
page
145
page
146
page
147
page
148
page
149
page
150
page
151
page
152
page
153
page
154
page
155
page
156
page
157
page
158
page
159
page
160
Transcript 
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﺡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Ä‬ﺭﻭی ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬
‫ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﺷﮑﺎﻝ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺎﺗﯽ‬
‫‪User Manual‬‬
‫‪SH100‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﻓﻮﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﯽ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‬
‫ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﻭ ﻧﮑﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺮﻭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺧﻄﺮی ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﻣﻨﺪ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ— ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻣﺼﺪﻭﻣﻴﺖ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ ﺧﺮﺩﺳﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ ﺧﺮﺩﺳﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﻠﻌﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺧﻔﮕﯽ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪﻭﻣﻴﺖ ﺟﺪی ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺤﺮک ﻭ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺧﻄﺮﺳﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﻌﯽ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺷﻮک ﺑﺮﻗﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻣﺎی ﺑﺎﻻ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮑﯽ ﮔﺎﺯﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻣﺎی ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ‬
‫ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﯽ ﺍﺟﺰﺍی ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮑﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭی ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﭘﻮﺷﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺘﻮ ﻳﺎ ﻟﺒﺎﺱ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻳﺎ ﺷﻮک ﺑﺮﻗﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﮔﺮﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﮐﻪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺧﻴﺲ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻧﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺷﻮک ﺑﺮﻗﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﺮﻗﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻄﻊ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ‪ Samsung‬ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﺑﻴﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ )ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ ١‬ﻣﺘﺮ‪ ٣/‬ﻓﻮﺕ( ﺑﻪ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﺑﻪ ﭼﺸﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻮژﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ‬
‫ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﯽ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ— ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻨﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺧﺎﺻﯽ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺮﻭی‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮑﯽ ﺍﺟﺘﻨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫• ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﻴﻤﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﻴﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺷﺮﮐﺖ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﭘﻴﺮﻭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﮐﻨﺎﻥ ﺷﺮﮐﺖ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮑﯽ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﭘﺰﺷﮑﯽ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﭘﺰﺷﮑﯽ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﻤﺎﺭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎی ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﮐﻨﺎﻥ ﺩﺭﻣﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺮﻭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎی ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺛﺮ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﺸﺖ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﭙﻮﺳﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺟﺪی ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻟﻴﺘﻴﻮﻡ‪-‬ﻳﻮﻥ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻧﺪﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﻧﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﺎﻥ ﻗﻠﺐ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻳﺎ ﺻﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﺮﺩی ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﻭ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻘﺎﺗﯽ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﺗﮑﻨﻮﻟﻮژی ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍی ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ‪ ١۵‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﺮی )‪ ۶‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ( ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﺎﻥ ﻗﻠﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺣﻔﻆ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻠﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺎﻥ ﻣﺸﮑﻮک ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﺎﻥ ﻗﻠﺐ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﭘﺰﺷﮑﯽ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﺎﻥ ﻗﻠﺐ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺰﺷﮑﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ‪ Samsung‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺭژﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‪ ،‬ﺧﺮﺍﺏ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﻭ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ Samsung‬ﺑﺎﺑﺖ ﺧﺮﺍﺑﯽ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻧﺎﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺭژﻫﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺘﯽ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﯽ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺎﺻﺪ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻳﺎ ﺷﻮک ﺑﺮﻗﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻨﮑﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺧﺮﺍﺑﯽ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﮔﺮﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺳﻮﺧﺘﮕﯽ ﭘﻮﺳﺖ ﺗﺎﻥ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ‪ AC‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ‪ ،AC‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺯﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺒﻌﻴﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﻕ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﮕﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭘﯽ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎی ﮐﻪ ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎی ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺏ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺧﺮﺍﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎک ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺒﻌﻴﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﻕ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﮕﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭘﯽ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺷﻮک ﺑﺮﻗﯽ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺑﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺷﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻳﺎ ﺷﻮک ﺑﺮﻗﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ‪ AC‬ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ‪ +‬ﻭ ‪ -‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﻕ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﮕﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﯽ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬
‫• ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ‪ WLAN‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻓﺎﺵ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻫﺎی ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺎﺯ ﺍﺟﺘﻨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻝ ﻫﻴﭻ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﻛﻪ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺣﻖ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻟﻜﻴﺖ ﻣﻌﻨﻮی ﻳﺎ ﻋﻔﺖ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻘﺾ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﻫﺎی ﻭﺍﺭﺩﻩ ﻧﺎﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﻧﻘﺺ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻫﻴﭻ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺘﯽ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻬﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮی ﮐﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ )‪ (S‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺮﻋﮑﺲ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻫﻴﭽﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺘﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮑﯽ ﺍﺟﺘﻨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ )‪ (RF‬ﻣﻨﺘﺸﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮑﯽ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺿﺮﺑﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻗﻠﺐ‪ ،‬ﺳﻤﻌﮏ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺰﺷﮑﯽ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮑﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺯﻝ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﺭﻭﻫﺎ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﻊ ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﺸﮑﻞ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮑﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﺎﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻳﺎ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ‪ Samsung‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﺎﺩی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﺡ ﮐﻠﯽ ﮐﺘﺎﺑﭽﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺣﻖ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Microsoft Windows‬ﻭ ﺁﺭﻡ ‪ Windows‬ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫‪ Microsoft Corporation‬ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Mac‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪ Apple Corporation‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫™‪ ،microSDHC™ ،microSD‬ﻋﻼﻳﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﻣﻮﺳﺴﻪ‬
‫‪.SD Association‬‬
‫®‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﺁﺭﻡ ‪ ،Wi-Fi CERTIFIED‬ﻭ ﺁﺭﻡ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی‬
‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪ Wi-Fi Alliance‬ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻳﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﻭ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺘﺎﺑﭽﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻟﮑﻴﺖ ﺻﺎﺣﺒﺎﻥ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪٣۵‬‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻭ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮑﯽ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫‪۵٢‬‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‬
‫•‬
‫‪١۴‬‬
‫‪٨٠‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﻭ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﻘﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﮐﺸﻮﺭی ﮐﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻳﺪﺍﺭی ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺑﺨﺸﯽ ﺍﺯﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺴﺐ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ‪،Open Source License‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ "‪ "OpenSourceInfo.pdf‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﯽ ﺩی ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ‬
‫‪١٠٧‬‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺤﻠﯽ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ )‪ WLAN‬ﻫﺎ( ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫‪١٢٧‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻄﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﮐﺴﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪١٣٣‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‬
‫] [‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪] ،‬ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫) (‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ‬
‫←‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ؛ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫‪ ← m‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ )ﻳﻌﻨﻲ‪ :‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ‪ m‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫*‬
‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬
‫‪ACB‬‬
‫‪) Auto Contrast Balance‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ(‬
‫‪AEB‬‬
‫‪) Auto Exposure Bracket‬ﮐﺮﻭﺷﻪ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ(‬
‫‪AF‬‬
‫‪) Auto Focus‬ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ(‬
‫‪AP‬‬
‫‪) Access Point‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ(‬
‫‪DIS‬‬
‫‪) Digital Image Stabilization‬ﻟﺮﺯﺷﮕﻴﺮ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬
‫‪DPOF‬‬
‫‪) Digital Print Order Format‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺵ ﭼﺎپ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ(‬
‫‪EV‬‬
‫‪) Exposure Value‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ(‬
‫‪ISO‬‬
‫‪) International Organization for Standardization‬ﻣﻮﺳﺴﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻠﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﺳﺎﺯی(‬
‫‪WB‬‬
‫‪) White Balance‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی(‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ )ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ(‬
‫• ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ :‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫• ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ :‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺭی ﮐﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪ ،ISO‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﺗﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺗﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﻋﺎﺩی‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻭ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﺑﻨﺪی‬
‫• ﺳﻮژﻩ‪ :‬ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻳﮏ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻳﮏ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺷﯽء‬
‫• ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‪ :‬ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﭘﻴﺮﺍﻣﻮﻥ ﺳﻮژﻩ‬
‫• ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﺑﻨﺪی‪ :‬ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﺑﻨﺪی‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ )ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ(‬
‫ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﺷﮑﺎﻝ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺎﺗﯽ‬
‫ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﺷﮑﺎﻻﺕ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﺸﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻮژﻩ‪ ،‬ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺍﻧﻌﮑﺎﺱ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۵٧‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ﻳﺎ‬
‫• ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻗﺒ ً‬
‫ﻼ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٩٧‬‬
‫ﻟﮑﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺫﺭﺍﺕ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻮﺍ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﻔﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﭘﺮ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻧﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪ ISO‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۵٩‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﮐﻢ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻧﮕﻪ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ‪ DIS‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٣٣‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺷﺐ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻼﺵ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﮐﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺷﻮﺍﺭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺗﺎﺭ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٣٩‬‬
‫• ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۵٧‬‬
‫• ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪ ISO‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۵٩‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﻟﺮﺯﻳﺪﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﺯﻳﺎﺩی ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻮﺍﺣﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ ﺗﻴﺮﻩ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻮﺭ ﭘﺲ‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻧﻮﺭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٣٨‬‬
‫• ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۵٧‬‬
‫• ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۶٨‬‬
‫• ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ )‪ (ACB‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۶٩‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺍی ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻧﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻧﻮﺭﺳﻨﺠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۶٩‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﻓﻮﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺒﺎ ◄ ‪٣٩‬‬
‫• ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ‪/‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ‬
‫)ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﻠﻮﻳﺰی ﻳﺎ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ( ◄ ‪۵٧‬‬
‫• ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ◄ ‪۶٣‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﺣﺸﺮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﮔﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ < ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻦ ◄ ‪٣٨‬‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﮐﻠﻮﺯﺁپ )ﻧﻤﺎی ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ( ◄ ‪٣٨‬‬
‫• ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ◄ ‪۶٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺐ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮑﯽ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ < ﻏﺮﻭﺏ ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﻃﻠﻮﻉ ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺏ ◄ ‪٣٨‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺐ ◄ ‪٣٩‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻼﺵ ◄ ‪۵٧‬‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪) ISO‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺭ( ◄ ‪۵٩‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫• ﻣﺪﺍﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ◄ ‪٧٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ )ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ(‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪) ISO‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺭ( ◄ ‪۵٩‬‬
‫‪) EV‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ( ◄ ‪۶٨‬‬
‫‪) ACB‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ( ◄ ‪۶٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ◄ ‪۶٩‬‬
‫‪) AEB‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺳﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ( ◄ ‪٧٢‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺷﻴﯽ ◄ ‪۴۴‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺟﺎﺩﻭﻳﯽ ◄ ‪۴۵‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻋﮑﺲ ◄ ‪۴۵‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺰﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ◄ ‪۴٨‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ◄ ‪٧٣‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻮﺡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ(‬
‫◄ ‪٧۶‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻫﺎ‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ◄ ‪۴٧‬‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺰﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ◄ ‪۴٨‬‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﭘﺎﻟﺖ ◄ ‪۴٩‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫• ﻟﺮﺯﺷﮕﻴﺮ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪٣٢ ◄ (DIS‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ◄ ‪٨۴‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎی ‪ ٣‬ﺑﻌﺪی‬
‫◄ ‪٨۵‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ◄ ‪٨۶‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ◄ ‪٨٧‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ◄ ‪٨٩‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ◄ ‪٩٨‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫◄ ‪٩٩‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ◄ ‪١١١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻜﺲ ◄ ‪١١۵‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺁﻥ ◄ ‪١٢٩‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫◄ ‪١٣٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ◄ ‪١٣١‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ◄ ‪١٣١‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫◄ ‪١۴٣‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ‪٣۵ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪٣۶ ..................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ‪٣۶ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ‪٣٧ .....................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ‪٣٨ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻤﺎی ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ‪٣٨ .....................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺷﺐ ‪٣٩ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺒﺎ ‪٣٩ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪۴٠ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪۴١ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ‪۴٢ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ‪۴۴ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺷﻴﺎ ‪۴۴ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻗﺎﺏ ﺟﺎﺩﻭﻳﯽ ‪۴۵ .....................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻋﮑﺲ ‪۴۵ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪۴٧ ..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺰﻳﻴﻨﯽ ‪۴٨ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﭘﺎﻟﺖ ‪۴٩ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ‪۵٠ .................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ‪۵٠ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ‪۵١ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‪١۴ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی ‪١۵ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺷﮑﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪١۶ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪١٨ ....................................................‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪١٩ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ‪١٩ .................................................................‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪١٩ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪٢٠ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻳﺎﺩﮔﻴﺮی ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ ‪٢٢ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ‪٢٣ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍ ‪٢۵ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ‪٢۵ .............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ ‪٢۵ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ ‪٢۶ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ ‪٢۶ .........................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ ‪٢۶ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ ‪٢٨ .................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪٢٩ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ‪٣٠ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ )‪٣٢ ..................................................... (DIS‬‬
‫ﻧﮑﺎﺗﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺗﺮ ‪٣٣ ..........................................‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۵٢ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﻭ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ‪۵٣ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ‪۵٣ .................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪۵۴ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ‪۵۶ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮑﯽ ‪۵٧ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ‪۵٧ .........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪۵٧ .....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪۵٩ .............................................................. ISO‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪۶٠ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎﮐﺮﻭ ‪۶٠ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ‪۶١ .................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺗﮏ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ‪۶٢ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ‪۶٢ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ‪۶٣ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ‪۶٣ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ‪۶۴ ........................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﻟﺒﺨﻨﺪ ‪۶۴ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭘﻠﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ ‪۶۵ .................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ‪۶۵ ................................................‬‬
‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﻫﺎ )‪۶۶ .......................... (My Star‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ ‪................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ )‪......................................... (EV‬‬
‫ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ )‪............................................... (ACB‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻧﻮﺭﺳﻨﺠﯽ ‪..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻮﺭ )ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی( ‪...........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ ‪..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎ‪/‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ‪........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ‪....................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ‪......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺯﻭﻡ ‪.......................................................................‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪............‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪۶٨‬‬
‫‪۶٨‬‬
‫‪۶٩‬‬
‫‪۶٩‬‬
‫‪٧٠‬‬
‫‪٧٢‬‬
‫‪٧٣‬‬
‫‪٧٣‬‬
‫‪٧۶‬‬
‫‪٧٧‬‬
‫‪٧٨‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪٨٠ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪٨١ ................................................‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪٨١ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ‪٨٨ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪٩٠ .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ‪٩٢ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ‪٩٣ .....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ‪٩٣ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ‪٩۴ .....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺵ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ‪٩۴ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ‪٩۵ ....................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ‪٩۵ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺵ ﭼﺎپ )‪٩٧ ................................................... (DPOF‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪٩٨ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻳﻨﺪﻭﺯ ‪٩٩ ...............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪١٠٠ .................................. Intelli-studio‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺷﺪﻧﯽ ‪١٠٢ ...........‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ )ﺑﺮﺍی ‪١٠٣ ................................. (Windows XP‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﮑﻴﻨﺘﺎﺵ ‪١٠۴ ...........................‬‬
‫ﭼﺎپ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﻋﮑﺲ )‪١٠۵ ............................... (PictBridge‬‬
‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ‪١٠٧...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ‪ WLAN‬ﻭ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ‪١٠٨ ..........................‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ‪١٠٨ ......................................................... WLAN‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ‪١٠٩ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ‪١٠٩ ............................................................ IP‬‬
‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ‪١١٠ .................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ‪١١١ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ‪١١١ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ‪١١٣ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ‪١١۴ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻜﺲ ‪١١۵ .......................................‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ‪١١۵ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﺁﭘﻠﻮﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪١١۵ .........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﻫﺎﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ‪١١۶ ...............‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪١٢٧......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪١٢٨ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪١٢٨ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍ ‪١٢٩ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ‪١٢٩ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪١٣٠ ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ ‪١٣١ .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻫﻤﻪ ‪١١٨ . AllShare‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪١١٨ .............................. I‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪١٢٠ ............................. II‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ‪١٢١ ....................‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ‪١٢١ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ‪١٢١ .............................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ Auto Backup‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪١٢٣ .......................‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ‪ Auto Backup‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ‪١٢٣ ......‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ‪١٢٣ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ‪١٢۴ .................. Blu-ray‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ )‪١٢۵ .................................... Wake on LAN(WOL‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪١٣٣...................................................................................‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻄﺎ ‪١٣۴ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪١٣۵ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪١٣۵ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪١٣۶ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪١٣٧ ........................................................‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ‪١٣٩ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ‪١۴٣ .....................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪١۴۶ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ ‪١۵٠ .................................................................‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ‪١۵۵ ........................................................................‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫……………………………… ‪١۵‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ …………………………… ‪٢۶‬‬
‫ﺷﮑﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ……………………………… ‪١۶‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ ……………………… ‪٢۶‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ …………………… ‪١٨‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫………… ‪١٩‬‬
‫…………………………… ‪١٩‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ …………………………… ‪١٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ …………………………………… ‪٢٠‬‬
‫ﻳﺎﺩﮔﻴﺮی ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ …………………………………… ‪٢٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ …………………………… ‪٢٣‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍ ………………………… ‪٢۵‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ……………… ‪٢۵‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫…………………………………… ‪٢۵‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ‬
‫…………………… ‪٢۶‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ ……………………………… ‪٢٨‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ …………………………………… ‪٢٩‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ )‪٣٢ …………………… (DIS‬‬
‫…………………………………… ‪٣٠‬‬
‫ﻧﮑﺎﺗﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺗﺮ …………… ‪٣٣‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی‬
‫ﺍﻗﻼﻡ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭی‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ‪/‬ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﺎﺭژ‬
‫ﺑﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻗﻠﻢ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ‬
‫ﺳﯽ ﺩی ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬
‫ﮐﻴﻒ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪A / V‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪/‬ﻣﺒﺪﻝ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺍﻧﺪﮐﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻗﻼﻡ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪١۵‬‬
‫ﺷﮑﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺯﻭﻡ‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ :‬ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺨﺸﯽ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ‬
‫ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪/AF‬ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻨﺰ‬
‫ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ*‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺳﻮﺍﺭ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ‪ USB‬ﻭ ‪A/V‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻭ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ A/V‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪١۶‬‬
‫ﺷﮑﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪-‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭﻓﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﺪ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫• ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﺯﻥ‪ :‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻳﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ‬
‫‪ ،WLAN‬ﻳﺎ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻳﻚ ﻋﻜﺲ‬
‫• ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ :‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪Home‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪١٧‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫ﻃﺮﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺁﺭﺍﻡ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﻮﺩ؛‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺷﮑﺎﻑ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻃﻮﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﻃﻼﻳﯽ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭی ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﺁﺭﻡ ‪ Samsung‬ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﺎﺭژ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻮﻗﺘﯽ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﺎﺭژ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪١٨‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎی ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [POWER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻳﯽ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی ﻇﺎﻫﺮ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٢٠‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﭘﺨﺶ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ‬
‫• ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺷﺎﺭژ‬
‫• ﻧﺎﺭﻧﺠﯽ‪ :‬ﺧﻄﺎ‬
‫ﻼ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫• ﺳﺒﺰ‪ :‬ﮐﺎﻣ ً‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ]ﭘﺨﺶ[‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪ ۵‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ ﺻﺪﺍﻳﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪١٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﻴﺮﻭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ Language‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ‪ o‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺍﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ‪ x ،‬ﻳﺎ ‪z‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺸﻮﺭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﺳﻔﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺯﺩﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﻟﻨﺪﻥ‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪٢٠‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ o ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺯ‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻗﻠﻢ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﻟﻴﺒﺮﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺎﺭﺁﻳﯽ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺎً ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺗﺎﺑﺴﺘﺎﻧﯽ‪،‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﻟﻴﺒﺮﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ o ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪٢١‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪ o‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺎﺩﮔﻴﺮی ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺟﺎﺭی‬
‫•‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ )ﻟﻤﺲ(‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫‪m‬‬
‫ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺳﻨﺠﯽ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺯﻭﻡ‬
‫ﻟﺮﺯﺷﮕﻴﺮ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪(DIS‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺯﻭﻡ‬
‫ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫)ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ(‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫•‬
‫ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺯﻭﻡ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻼ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫‪ :‬ﮐﺎﻣ ً‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﺎ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﯽ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻟﯽ )ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ(‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺟﺎﺭی‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪٢٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻗﻠﻢ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻟﻤﺲ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺸﻴﺪﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﺗﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺏ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ‬
‫‪Auto Backup‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻗﻠﻢ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻫﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺸﻴﺪﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺨﺸﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ؛ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻗﻠﻢ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی‬
‫ﺭﻭﺯ‬
‫ﺍﺑﺮی‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪٢٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫•‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ‪ o‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی‬
‫ﺭﻭﺯ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﺑﺮی‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍی ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﭘﻴﺎﭘﯽ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪DIS‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪٢۴‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ‬
‫ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ ﻣﯽ ﮐﺸﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻳﮏ ﻧﻘﺺ ﻣﺤﺴﻮﺏ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﮑﻪ ﺟﺰﻭ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺛﺮ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺭ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺸﻴﺪﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻼﻳﻤﺖ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮﮔﺬﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺩﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻢ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺩﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪،‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ‪ o‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﮐﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺨﻔﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﮐﺎﻣﻞ‪ :‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﻔﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ‪ ۵‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﮐﺎﺭی ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺨﻔﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ )ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‪ :‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺳﻄﺢ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺍﻓﻖ ﻳﺎ ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻫﺎ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪٢۵‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮑﯽ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺑﻴﭗ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺑﻴﭗ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻳﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ [HOME] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻠﯽ‪ [HOME] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٣۶‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﮐﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۴٠‬‬
‫ﻭﺏ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫ﻴﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤ‬
‫ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ‬
‫‪Auto Backup‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻞ‬
‫ﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻤﻴ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۴٢‬‬
‫ﻭﺏ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﻭﺏ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١١۵‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١١١‬‬
‫‪ :Auto Backup‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ‪ Blu-ray‬ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١٢٣‬‬
‫ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪ :‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٨۴‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١٢٨‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ﻳﺎﺏ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻳﮏ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺭﻫﺎ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١١۶‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎ ﮐﺸﻴﺪﻥ ﻗﻠﻢ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺟﺎﺭی‪) .‬‬
‫(‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪٢۶‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ :‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻳﮏ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک‬
‫ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١٢١‬‬
‫‪ :AllShare‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻳﮏ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ‪ AllShare‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١١٨‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ :‬ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۴١‬‬
‫ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻳﮏ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺧﺎﺹ‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٣٨‬‬
‫ﺗﺰﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺗﺰﻳﻴﻨﯽ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۴٨‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺒﺎ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﻣﺨﻔﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﻮﺍﻗﺺ‬
‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮی‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٣٩‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ :‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻉ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٩۵‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺟﺎﺩﻭﻳﯽ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻉ ﻗﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۴۵‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻉ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۴۵‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻉ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۴٧‬‬
‫ﺷﺐ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺷﺒﺎﻧﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٣٩‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﭘﺎﻟﺖ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۴٩‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪٢٧‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﮐﻠﻮﺯﺁپ )ﻧﻤﺎی ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ(‪ :‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﺷﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﻧﻤﺎی ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٣٨‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٣٧‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺷﻴﯽ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺎﺭ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۴۴‬‬
‫ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی‪ :‬ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٨۵‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪﺷﻮ‪ :‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻉ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٨٩‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ‪ :‬ﻳﮏ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۵٠‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎی ﺭﻭﺯﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍی‪ :‬ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٨۵‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺏ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫‪Auto Backup‬‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻳﮏ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻟﺒﻪ ﭼﭗ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺁﻳﮑﻮﻥ ﺭﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺁﻳﮑﻮﻧﻬﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺏ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪٢٨‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺏ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ‬
‫‪Auto Backup‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺳﺒﺰ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮑﺎﺕ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ٣٣‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪٢٩‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺯﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻠﻮﺯﺁپ )ﻧﻤﺎی ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ( ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺯﻭﻡ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭی ‪ ۵‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ‪ ،‬ﺯﻭﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ‪ ٢‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻭ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ‪ ۵‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻧﻮﺭی ﻭ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ‪ ٢۵‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ )ﺯﻭﻡ( ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺯﻭﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ )ﺯﻭﻡ( ﻧﻮﺭی‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺯﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫• ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻭ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ )ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ ﻣﺘﻦ( ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻟﻤﺲ‬
‫ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻓﺖ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻮﭼﮑﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪٣٠‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺮﺥ ﺯﻭﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻧﻮﺭی ﻭ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ‪ ١٠‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺩ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺯﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ )ﺯﻭﻡ( ﻧﻮﺭی‬
‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻭ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫)ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ‪ ۴:٣‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺯﻭﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻟﻤﺲ‬
‫ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺖ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺯﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﺮﭼﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻧﻮﺭی‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻨﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪٣١‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ m ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮑﯽ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ )‪(DIS‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﮑﺎﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ m ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮑﯽ ‪ DIS‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﭘﻴﺎﭘﯽ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪DIS‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪٣٢‬‬
‫• ‪ DIS‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻣﺘﺤﺮک‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬‫ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ )ﻣﺜﻼً‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺷﺒﺎﻧﻪ(‬‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺍﺳﺖ‬‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮐﻠﻮﺯﺁپ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬‫• ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺎﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﮑﺎﺗﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺗﺮ‬
‫ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺷﻴﻮﻩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ »ﻟﺮﺯﺷﮕﻴﺮ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ« ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٣٢‬‬
‫ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﭼﻴﺰی ﺟﻠﻮی‬
‫ﻟﻨﺰ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻧﮕﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ‪ h‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬
‫• ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺒﺰ ﺷﺪﻥ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺷﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮑﯽ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺁﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻧﮕﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺷﻮﺍﺭﺗﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۵٧‬‬
‫• ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪ ISO‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۵٩‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪٣٣‬‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺳﻮژﻩ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺷﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻤﯽ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬‫)ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻟﺒﺎﺱ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺷﺒﻴﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ(‬
‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻮﺭ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬‫ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻕ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺯﺗﺎﺏ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‬‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻃﺮﺡ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﭘﺮﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﮐﺮﻩ‬‫‪ -‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﮕﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺭ ﮐﻢ‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۵٧‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻣﺪﺍﻭﻡ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٧٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﺑﻨﺪی‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﭼﻴﺰ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪] ،‬ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪٣۴‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻭ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫………………… ‪٣۶‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ………………………… ‪۴۴‬‬
‫……………… ‪٣۶‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺷﻴﺎ ……………… ‪۴۴‬‬
‫‪٣٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻗﺎﺏ ﺟﺎﺩﻭﻳﯽ …………………… ‪۴۵‬‬
‫‪٣٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻋﮑﺲ ……………………… ‪۴۵‬‬
‫‪٣٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺰﻳﻴﻨﯽ ………………………… ‪۴٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﭘﺎﻟﺖ ……………… ‪۴٩‬‬
‫‪۴٠‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ……………………………… ‪۵٠‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ……………………‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ …………………………‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻤﺎی ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ……………………‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺷﺐ ……………………………‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺒﺎ ……………………‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ …………………………‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ……………………………‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ……………………‬
‫‪٣٩‬‬
‫‪٣٩‬‬
‫‪۴١‬‬
‫‪۴٢‬‬
‫……………………… ‪۴٧‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ …………………………… ‪۵٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ …………… ‪۵١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺐ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﻧﻤﺎی ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺷﻴﺎ‬
‫• ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﻧﻤﺎی ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻦ‬
‫ﻏﺮﻭﺏ‬
‫ﺁﺳﻤﺎﻥ ﺻﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺟﻨﮕﻠﯽ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﻧﻤﺎی ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺷﻴﺎی ﺭﻧﮕﯽ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮑﯽ(‬
‫ﺁﺗﺶ ﺑﺎﺯی )ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ(‬
‫ﺍﺷﻴﺎی ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺐ )ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ(‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪٣۶‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺗﺎ ﻧﺼﻔﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬
‫ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺍی ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ‪ ،‬ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻧﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﮔﻬﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺰﻧﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪٣٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻤﺎی ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻳﮏ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺧﺎﺹ‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻤﺎی ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﮔﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺸﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻋﺴﮑﻬﺎی ﻧﻤﺎی‬
‫ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ‪،‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ‪ :‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﻭ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺖ ﺑﯽ ﺟﺎﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻏﺮﻭﺏ ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺏ‪ :‬ﺍﺯ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻏﺮﻭﺏ ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺏ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎی ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﻭ ﺯﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﯽ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﻠﻮﻉ ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺏ‪ :‬ﺍﺯ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻃﻠﻮﻉ ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‪ :‬ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺗﺎﺑﻴﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﺣﻞ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻑ‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻌﮑﺲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﻑ‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﮐﻢ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻦ‪ :‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﭼﺎپ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮑﯽ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﺤﯽ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪٣٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺷﺐ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺒﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺷﺐ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﮐﻢ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺒﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﻣﺨﻔﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﻴﻮﺏ‬
‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮی‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻓﻠﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺰﻧﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﻭ ﺭﺗﻮﺵ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﺜﻼً‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﭘﻮﺳﺖ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺗﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺭﺗﻮﺵ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﺭ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺒﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﮥ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮐﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪٣٩‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ‪،‬‬
‫ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ m‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺟﻬﺖ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ۵٢‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﺒﺮﻫﺎی ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ← m ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻦ ←‪o‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪۴٠‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﻮ‬
‫‪EV‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺁﻳﮑﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﺒﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﮑﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﮑﺸﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪EV‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﻮ‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ o ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﻬﺎی ﺑﺎ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ‪ ٢٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﻤﻬﺎی ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ‪ (H.264) MP4‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ ،(MPEG-4 part10/AVC) H.264‬ﻳﮏ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻠﯽ ‪ ISO-IEC‬ﻭ ‪ ITU-T‬ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺑﺎﻻ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﮑﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﮐﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺎ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ m‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺟﻬﺖ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ۵٢‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ‪ ٣‬ﻣﻴﺎﻧﺒﺮ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪۴١‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﮑﺚ ﺩﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﮑﺚ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺠﺰﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﮏ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﮑﺚ ﺩﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻏﺮﻭﺏ‬
‫ﺁﺳﻤﺎﻥ ﺻﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺟﻨﮕﻠﯽ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪۴٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ‪ ،‬ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪۴٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺟﻠﻮﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺷﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺷﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻋﻤﻖ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﺎﻳﺰ ﭘﺬﻳﺮی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺎی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ ﮐﻪ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮ‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺷﻴﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮ‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺷﻴﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺎ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺯﻭﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺰﻧﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﺎﺭی ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭی‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪۴۴‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺷﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭﻟﯽ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺷﻴﺎ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺷﻴﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﻬﺎی ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺷﻴﺎ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻧﻮﺭی ‪ ٣‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺷﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﭘﻴﺎﭘﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﻴﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺟﻠﻮﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻗﺎﺏ ﺟﺎﺩﻭﻳﯽ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺟﺎﺩﻭﻳﯽ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻋﮑﺲ ﺧﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻭ ﻧﻤﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺎﺏ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻋﮑﺲ ﺧﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺏ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺟﺎﺩﻭﻳﯽ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﻨﻴﺎﺗﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺰﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﭼﺸﻢ ﻣﺎﻫﯽ‬
‫ﻃﺮﺡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺎ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪۴۵‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺟﻠﻮﻩ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻨﻴﺎﺗﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺰﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻗﺪﻳﻤﯽ‪1‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﮐﺠﯽ‪-‬‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻗﺪﻳﻤﯽ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺗﺰﻳﻴﻨﯽ ﻗﻮی‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺎی ‪ Lomo‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻴﻮﺏ ﻇﺎﻫﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻣﺨﻔﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻭﻳﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻗﺪﻳﻤﯽ‪2‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﮐﻢ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﮐﻢ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻃﺮﺡ ﻣﺪﺍﺩی ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﺸﻢ ﻣﺎﻫﯽ‬
‫ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻴﺮﻩ ﺗﺮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﺭﺍ ﮐﻤﯽ ﺧﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺎ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﻳﮏ ﻟﻨﺰ ﭼﺸﻢ ﻣﺎﻫﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺪ ﻣﻪ‬
‫ﮐﻼﺳﻴﮏ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺳﻴﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻗﻬﻮﻩ ﺍی‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﻭ ﻗﻬﻮﻩ ﺍی ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﺎﺗﻴﻮ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻧﮕﺎﺗﻴﻮ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻗﺪﻳﻤﯽ ‪ ١‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻗﺪﻳﻤﯽ ‪ ٢‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺗﺮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪۴۶‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‪،‬‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻃﺮﺡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﯽ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﯽ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﭼﺸﻢ ﻣﺎﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺟﻠﻮﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻉ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻼﺳﻴﮏ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺳﻴﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻗﻬﻮﻩ ﺍی‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﻭ ﻗﻬﻮﻩ ﺍی ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﺎﺗﻴﻮ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻧﮕﺎﺗﻴﻮ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻴﻨﻴﺎﺗﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻴﻨﻴﺎﺗﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻴﻨﻴﺎﺗﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺰﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﮐﻢ ﺭﻧﮓ‪ ،‬ﻃﺮﺡ‪ ،‬ﭼﺸﻢ ﻣﺎﻫﯽ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺿﺪ ﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻨﻴﺎﺗﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺰﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﮐﺠﯽ‪-‬‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻗﺪﻳﻤﯽ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺗﺰﻳﻴﻨﯽ‬
‫ﻗﻮی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺎی ‪ Lomo‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﮐﻢ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﮐﻢ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻃﺮﺡ ﻣﺪﺍﺩی ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﺸﻢ ﻣﺎﻫﯽ‬
‫ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﺑﺪﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﻟﻨﺰ ﭼﺸﻢ ﻣﺎﻫﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺪ ﻣﻪ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺗﺮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪۴٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺟﻠﻮﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺰﻳﻴﻨﯽ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺰﻳﻴﻨﯽ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺗﺰﻳﻴﻨﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﺑﭙﺮﺩﺍﺯﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ‪،‬‬
‫)ﻋﮑﺲ( ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺗﺰﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻓﻴﻠﻢ( ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺰﻧﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺳﻄﺢ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺎ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺗﺰﻳﻴﻨﯽ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻄﺢ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪۴٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺟﻠﻮﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﭘﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎی ﺧﺎﺻﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﭘﺎﻟﺖ ‪1‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﭘﺎﻟﺖ ‪2‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﻮﻥ ﺁﺑﯽ ﺁﺭﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻔﺎﻑ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﭘﺎﻟﺖ ‪3‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻗﻬﻮﻩ ﺍی ﻣﻼﻳﻢ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﭘﺎﻟﺖ ‪4‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺳﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺗﮏ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪۴٩‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻌﺪﺍً ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﮏ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻳﺎﺩﺁﻭﺭی ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‪ ١۶ ،‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ )‪ ۴٠‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ( ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ‪،‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‪،‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﮑﺚ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ ‪ ١٠‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪۵٠‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﮏ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻩ )ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ‪ ١٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ( ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻓﺮﺻﺖ ‪ ١٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺍی‪،‬‬
‫]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ m‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮑﯽ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﮑﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻴﺪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪۵١‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﻭ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ …………………………… ‪۵٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ‬
‫…………………………… ‪۵٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ………………… ‪۶۵‬‬
‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﻫﺎ )‪(My Star‬‬
‫‪۶۶‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ …………………………… ‪۵۴‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ …………………………… ‪۶٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ …………………………………… ‪۵۶‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ )‪۶٨ …………… (EV‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮑﯽ …………………………… ‪۵٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ )‪(ACB‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻧﻮﺭﺳﻨﺠﯽ …………………………… ‪۶٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻮﺭ )ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی( …………… ‪٧٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪۵٩ …………………………… ISO‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ ………………………… ‪٧٢‬‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ‬
‫……………………… ‪۵٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ………………………………… ‪۵٧‬‬
‫……………… ‪۶٩‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ……………………………… ‪۶٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎ‪/‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ……………………… ‪٧٣‬‬
‫……………………………… ‪۶٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ …………………… ‪٧٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ………………… ‪۶١‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ………………………………… ‪٧۶‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎﮐﺮﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺗﮏ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ …… ‪۶٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ …………………………… ‪۶٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ …………………………… ‪۶٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ……………………………… ‪۶٣‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ……………………… ‪۶۴‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﻟﺒﺨﻨﺪ …………………………… ‪۶۴‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭘﻠﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ ……………………………… ‪۶۵‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺯﻭﻡ‬
‫………………………………… ‪٧٧‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی …………………………………… ‪٧٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﻭ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﻭ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻭ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﻏﺬی ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﭼﺎپ ﮐﺮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍی ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫‪ :4320 X 3240‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ‪ A1‬ﭼﺎپ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :4320 X 2880‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ‪ A1‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ )‪ (٣:٢‬ﭼﺎپ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :4320 X 2432‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ‪ A2‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﺎ )‪ (١۶:٩‬ﭼﺎپ‬
‫ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ HD‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :3648 X 2736‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ‪ A2‬ﭼﺎپ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ← m ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :2592 X 1944‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ‪ A4‬ﭼﺎپ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ‪ o‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :1984 X 1488‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ‪ A5‬ﭼﺎپ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :1920 X 1080‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ‪ A5‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﺎ )‪ (١۶:٩‬ﭼﺎپ‬
‫ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ HD‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫‪4320 X 2880‬‬
‫‪ :1024 X 768‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪4320 X 2432‬‬
‫‪3648 X 2736‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۵٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﻭ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﯽ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ← m ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ‪ o‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻳﮏ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ‪ JPEG‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪1280 X 720 HQ‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪1280 X 720‬‬
‫‪640 X 480‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ← m ،‬ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ‪ o‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺧﻮﺏ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺏ‬
‫‪ :1280 X 720 HQ‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺎ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪HD‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ :1280 X 720‬ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ HD‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :640 X 480‬ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻮگ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :320 X 240‬ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﺏ ﻣﻨﺘﺸﺮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻦ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﻭﺏ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺧﻮﺏ‪ :‬ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺧﻮﺏ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻮﺏ‪ :‬ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺧﻮﺏ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۵۴‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﻭ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻳﮏ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﯽ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﻤﻬﺎی ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ‪ (H.264) MP4‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ← m ،‬ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ‪ o‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻓﺮﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﯽ ﺗﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺭﺳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫‪ 30‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬
‫‪ 15‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫‪ 30‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‪ ٣٠ :‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 15‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‪ ١۵ :‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۵۵‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﻪ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ← m ،‬ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ‪ o‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪/AF‬ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ‬
‫• ﺟﻬﺖ ﻟﻐﻮ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺎی ﺁﻥ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﺩﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 10‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺑﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ :‬ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 10‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺎﺧﻴﺮ ‪ ١٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺍی‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺎﺧﻴﺮ ‪ ٢‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺍی‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺑﻞ‪ :‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ‪ ١٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺗﺎﺧﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ‪ ٢‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺗﺎﺧﻴﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۵۶‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮑﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺷﺐ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﮐﻢ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮑﯽ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺭ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﺩﺭ ﭼﺸﻢ ﻭی‬
‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‪ ،‬ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺭ »ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ« ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮑﯽ ﻳﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﻧﻴﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ← m ،‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ‪ o‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬
‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺒﺎ ﻭ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺐ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻓﻼﺵ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺭ ﮐﻢ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺮﺯﺷﯽ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‪ :‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۵٧‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮑﯽ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺛﺮ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺯﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﮑﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻧﺨﻮﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺑﺰﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻓﻼﺵ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺷﺪﺕ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺁﻫﺴﺘﻪ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺭی ﺷﺪﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺭ ﮐﻢ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺮﺯﺷﯽ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺯﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﮑﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻧﺨﻮﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺑﺰﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۵٨‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭘﻠﮏ‬
‫ﺯﺩﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١۴۶‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺎﺯﺗﺎﺏ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻳﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻮﺟﻬﯽ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻮﺍ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻟﮑﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻳﺰی ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮑﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪ ISO‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺭ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻠﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﺳﺎﺯی )‪ (ISO‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺗﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪ ISO‬ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﻬﺘﺮی ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ISO ← m ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ‪ o‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ‪ ISO‬ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ISO‬‬
‫‪ISO 80‬‬
‫‪ISO 100‬‬
‫‪ISO 200‬‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ‪ ISO‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺯﻳﺖ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۵٩‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎﮐﺮﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎﮐﺮﻭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻠﻮﺯﺁپ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﮔﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺸﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺎﮐﺮﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ← m ،‬ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮑﯽ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬
‫ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ )ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ(‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﺭ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻌﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ ١۶‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ )‪ ۴٠‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ( ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۶٠‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ )ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ(‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺍی ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ‪ ٣٢‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ )‪ ٨٠‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ( ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ‪ :‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ‪ ٢-٣٢‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ )‪ ۵-٨٠‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺮ( ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ‪ ٣٩-۵٩ ،‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ﻳﺎ ]‪ ١٠٠-١۵٠‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ[(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫•‬
‫‪ AF‬ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺣﺘﯽ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺩﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ← m ،‬ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ‪ o‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺩﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﻟﻤﺲ‪ ،‬ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫• ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﻳﻌﻨﯽ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺳﺒﺰ ﻳﻌﻨﯽ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۶١‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺩﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﺎﻣﻮﻓﻖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﺍﺳﺖ‬‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻧﻮﺭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ‬‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻃﺮﺡ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻭ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻳﮑﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻃﺮﺡ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﭘﺮﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﮐﺮﻩ‬‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺷﺪﻳﺪی ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﺎﻣﻮﻓﻖ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺭﺩﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﮏ‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﯽ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ )‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺩﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺩﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﮏ ﺧﻄﯽ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ )‬
‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺗﮏ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺟﺎی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﻫﺎی ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺗﺮی ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ← m ،‬ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺗﮏ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ‪ o‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ← m ،‬ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ‪ o‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺗﮏ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ‬
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻠﻒ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﻭ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ‬
‫ﻫﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۶٢‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻣﺮﮐﺰی‪ :‬ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﻭی ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ )ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ‪ :‬ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺍﺯ ‪ ٩‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﮥ‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺗﮏ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻮژﻩ‬
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۶٢‬‬
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‪ :‬ﺭﻭی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺭﺩﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۶١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺭﻭی ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﺸﻤﻬﺎی ﺑﺴﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭘﻠﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻣﺘﺒﺴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺒﺨﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺛﺒﺖ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﺩﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺑﺮﺍی »ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺒﺨﻨﺪ« ﻭ‬‫»ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭘﻠﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ« ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻧﺎﺭﻧﺠﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺁﻳﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻓﻀﺎ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‬‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻋﻴﻨﮏ ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺑﯽ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺎﺳﮏ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬‫ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺯﻳﺎﺩی ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬‫ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻧﻮﺭی ﻧﺎﭘﺎﻳﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‬‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ‪ AF‬ﻟﻤﺲ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺛﺒﺖ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ (٨٣‬ﺣﺘﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﻓﻘﻴﺖ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ‪ ١٠‬ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ← m ،‬ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ‪ o‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮑﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺳﻔﻴﺪﺭﻧﮓ ﻭ ﺑﻘﻴﻪ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺩﺭﻫﺎی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺧﺎﮐﺴﺘﺮی ﺭﻧﮓ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۶٣‬‬
‫• ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮑﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺗﺮ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺧﺎﮐﺴﺘﺮی‪ ،‬ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﺍﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،AEB ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﻟﺒﺨﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﻮﺯﺁپ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﺑﻴﭗ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﮏ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺧﻨﺪﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ← m ،‬ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ‪ o‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺑﻴﭗ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ← m ،‬ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺒﺨﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ‪ o‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﮏ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺧﻨﺪﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ ﺑﻮﻕ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻟﺒﺨﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﺯﺗﺮی ﺑﺰﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺁﺳﺎﻧﺘﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻟﺒﺨﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺑﻴﭗ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١٢٩‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۶۴‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭘﻠﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﭼﺸﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ‪ ٢‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ← m ،‬ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭘﻠﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ‪ o‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ← m ،‬ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ‪ o‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺘﯽ "ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ" ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻧﮕﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭘﻠﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺎﻡ "ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪ ﮐﻪ ﭼﺸﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺩﻩ" ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮑﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺳﻔﻴﺪﺭﻧﮓ ﻭ ﺑﻘﻴﻪ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭﻫﺎی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬
‫ﺧﺎﮐﺴﺘﺮی ﺭﻧﮓ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﺛﺒﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫)ﺑﺮﺍی ﺛﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ۶۶‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪ :‬ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۶۵‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬
‫• ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻧﻮﺭی‪ ،‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺭ ژﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ‬
‫ﻋﻴﻨﮏ ﺑﻪ ﭼﺸﻢ ﺯﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻧﺪﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺗﺎ ‪ ١۴‬ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ‪ ١۴‬ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺟﺪﻳﺪی ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ‬
‫ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺍی ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ‪ ۵‬ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﻫﺎ )‪(My Star‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺛﺒﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺑﻨﺪی ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ← m ،‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ‪ FR‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ My Star‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ‪ o‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﺑﻴﻀﯽ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۶۶‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﺑﻴﻀﯽ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺛﺒﺖ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺴﺐ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﭘﻨﺞ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮ‪ ،‬ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺯ ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺯﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺳﺮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻧﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﯽ ﺑﺎ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭼﻬﺮۀ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺛﺒﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫• ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫• ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ‪ ۶‬ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺛﺒﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﻚ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻜﯽ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻫﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ← m ،‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ‪ FR‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ‪ o‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٨٣‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﺗﺒﻪ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﻳﮏ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۶٧‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ )‪(EV‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺪﺕ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﻬﺘﺮی ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﺗﺮ )‪(-‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺧﻨﺜﯽ )‪(٠‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺗﺮ )‪(+‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ EV ← m ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ‪ o‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺘﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﮑﻮﻥ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۶٨‬‬
‫• ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺾ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺷﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻌﺪﺍً ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺩﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﮐﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‪) AEB ،‬ﮐﺮﻭﺷﻪ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ( ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﭘﻴﺎﭘﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ :‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﮐﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٧٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ )‪(ACB‬‬
‫• ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ‪ ACB‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺻﺤﻨﻪ )ﺳﺎﺣﻞ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻑ( ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺪﺍﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ‪ AEB‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ‪ ACB‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﺯﻳﺎﺩی ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺲ‬
‫ﻻ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪،‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎ ً‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ »ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ« )‪ (ACB‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻧﻮﺭﺳﻨﺠﯽ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻮﺭﺳﻨﺠﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﯽ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﮐﻤﻴﺖ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻮﺭﺳﻨﺠﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪ACB‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ‪ACB‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ m ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ← m ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ‪ o‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮑﯽ ‪ ACB‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻣﺮﮐﺰی‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ‬
‫‪ACB‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۶٩‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻮﺭ )ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی(‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺷﺪﺕ ﻧﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی‪:‬‬
‫• ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺷﺪﺕ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﮕﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻧﻮﺭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﮐﺰی‪:‬‬
‫• ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺣﺪ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﮕﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺶ ﻧﻮﺭﺳﻨﺠﯽ ﮐﻞ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺄﮐﻴﺪ ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺷﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻧﻮﺭی‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؛ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺮی ﻳﺎ ﺗﻨﮕﺴﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی‬
‫ﺭﻭﺯ‬
‫ﺍﺑﺮی‬
‫ﺗﻨﮕﺴﺘﻦ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪٧٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ← m ،‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺗﮑﻪ ﺍی‬
‫ﮐﺎﻏﺬ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻧﻮﺭی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﮐﻤﮏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ‪ o‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی‬
‫ﺭﻭﺯ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺮی‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‪H-‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ← m ،‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ‪ o‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻨﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی‪ :‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭی ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺯ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺑﯽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺮی‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺍﺑﺮی ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‪ :H-‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺯ ﻳﺎ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺳﻪ ﺷﺎﺧﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‪ :L-‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﮕﺴﺘﻦ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻻﻣﭗ‬
‫ﻫﺎی ﭘﺮﻧﻮﺭ ﻳﺎ ﻫﺎﻟﻮژﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‪ :‬ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ﮐﻪ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪٧١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﯽ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻭ ژﺳﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﺸﮑﻠﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺗﮑﯽ‪ :‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺍﻭﻡ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ‪ VGA‬ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ )‪ ۶‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ؛ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ‬
‫‪ ٣٠‬ﻋﮑﺲ(‪.‬‬
‫‪:AEB‬‬
‫• ﺳﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻫﺮ ﮐﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺗﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﮐﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺟﻬﺖ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﺭ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ← m ،‬ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﭘﻴﺎﭘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ‪ o‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﭘﻴﺎﭘﯽ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺍﻭﻡ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫• ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﻭ ‪ ACB‬ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺗﮑﯽ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ‪ ،VGA‬ﻭ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪AEB‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪٧٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎ‪/‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﻠﻖ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﺤﺼﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻭ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻫﺎی‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﻨﻴﺎﺗﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺰﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﭼﺸﻢ ﻣﺎﻫﯽ‬
‫ﻃﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩی‪ :‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻨﻴﺎﺗﻮﺭ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﮐﺠﯽ‪-‬‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺰﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻗﺪﻳﻤﯽ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺗﺰﻳﻴﻨﯽ ﻗﻮی‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺎی ‪ Lomo‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‪ :‬ﻋﻴﻮﺏ ﻇﺎﻫﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻣﺨﻔﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻭﻳﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻗﺪﻳﻤﯽ‪ :1‬ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻗﺪﻳﻤﯽ ‪ ١‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻗﺪﻳﻤﯽ‪ :2‬ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻗﺪﻳﻤﯽ ‪ ٢‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﮐﻢ ﺭﻧﮓ‪ :‬ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﮐﻢ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﺡ‪ :‬ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻃﺮﺡ ﻣﺪﺍﺩی ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﺸﻢ ﻣﺎﻫﯽ‪ :‬ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻴﺮﻩ ﺗﺮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﺭﺍ ﮐﻤﯽ ﺧﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﻳﮏ ﻟﻨﺰ ﭼﺸﻢ ﻣﺎﻫﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺪ ﻣﻪ‪ :‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺗﺮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ← m ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ‪ o‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪٧٣‬‬
‫ﮐﻼﺳﻴﮏ‪ :‬ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺳﻴﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎ‪/‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻨﻴﺎﺗﻮﺭ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﮐﺠﯽ‪-‬‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻗﻬﻮﻩ ﺍی‪ :‬ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﻭ ﻗﻬﻮﻩ ﺍی ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﺎﺗﻴﻮ‪ :‬ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻧﮕﺎﺗﻴﻮ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺰﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﮐﻢ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ RGB‬ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ‪ :‬ﻳﮏ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﮐﻢ ﺭﻧﮓ‪ :‬ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﮐﻢ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﺡ‪ :‬ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻃﺮﺡ ﻣﺪﺍﺩی ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﯽ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻃﺮﺡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﯽ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﭼﺸﻢ ﻣﺎﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﭼﺸﻢ ﻣﺎﻫﯽ‪ :‬ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻴﺮﻩ ﺗﺮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﺭﺍ ﮐﻤﯽ ﺧﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﻳﮏ ﻟﻨﺰ ﭼﺸﻢ ﻣﺎﻫﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺪ ﻣﻪ‪ :‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺗﺮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﮐﻼﺳﻴﮏ‪ :‬ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺳﻴﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻗﻬﻮﻩ ﺍی‪ :‬ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﻭ ﻗﻬﻮﻩ ﺍی ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩی‪ :‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ‬
‫ﻧﮕﺎﺗﻴﻮ‪ :‬ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻧﮕﺎﺗﻴﻮ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﭘﺎﻟﺖ ‪ :1‬ﻳﮏ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ RGB‬ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ‪ :‬ﻳﮏ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﭘﺎﻟﺖ ‪ :2‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﻮﻥ ﺁﺑﯽ ﺁﺭﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻔﺎﻑ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﭘﺎﻟﺖ ‪ :3‬ﻳﮏ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻗﻬﻮﻩ ﺍی ﻣﻼﻳﻢ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﭘﺎﻟﺖ ‪ :4‬ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺳﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺗﮏ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪٧۴‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎ‪/‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺭﻧﮓ ‪ RGB‬ﺷﺨﺼﯽ‬
‫•‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ← m ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪ RGB‬ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ‪ o‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻫﺮ ﺭﻧﮓ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺗﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻴﺮﻩ ﺗﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ RGB‬ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ o ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪٧۵‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﻨﻴﺎﺗﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻴﻨﻴﺎﺗﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺻﺪﺍﻳﯽ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ‬
‫ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻴﻨﻴﺎﺗﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺰﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﮐﻢ ﺭﻧﮓ‪ ،‬ﻃﺮﺡ‪ ،‬ﭼﺸﻢ ﻣﺎﻫﯽ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺿﺪ ﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‪،‬‬
‫‪ ،ACB‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺯﻭﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺲ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎ‪/‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ← m ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻫﺮ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪ :‬ﻭﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫‪ :‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ o ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫‬‫‪+‬‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻼﻳﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻮﻳﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺍی ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪ ٠ ،‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﭼﺎپ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺗﺮﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪٧۶‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺯﻭﻡ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪﺍی ﺯﻭﻡ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ← m ،‬ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ‪ o‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫‪ Sound Alive‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫‪ Sound Alive‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫‪ Sound Alive‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪ :‬ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Sound Alive‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ :‬ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﺻﺪﺍ‪ :‬ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺯﻧﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻧﭙﻮﺷﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎی ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎی ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﻓﺮﻕ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪٧٧‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺴﺐ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ "ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی" ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‬
‫ﮐﻠﻮﺯﺁپ )ﻧﻤﺎی‬
‫ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ(‬
‫ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺐ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺒﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ‬
‫‪U‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪U‬‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫‪U‬‬
‫‪U‬‬
‫‪U‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪U‬‬
‫‪U‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ‬
‫‪U‬‬
‫‪U‬‬
‫‪U‬‬
‫‪U‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪U‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪ISO‬‬
‫‪U‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪U‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪U‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪U‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺳﻨﺠﯽ‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪EV‬‬
‫‪ACB‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﭘﻴﺎﭘﯽ‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪U‬‬
‫‪U‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﺯﻧﺪﻩ‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪U‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫‪U‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪U‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪U‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪DIS‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪ U‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺧﺎﺻﯽ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪٧٨‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺷﻴﯽ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﺮﻳﻢ‬
‫ﺟﺎﺩﻭﻳﯽ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺰﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫)ﻋﮑﺲ(‬
‫ﺗﺰﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫)ﻓﻴﻠﻢ(‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﭘﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪U‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ‬
‫‪U‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪U‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪U‬‬
‫‪U‬‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪U‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪U‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪U‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪ISO‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ‬
‫‪U‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪U‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪U‬‬
‫‪U‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪EV‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪ACB‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺳﻨﺠﯽ‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﭘﻴﺎﭘﯽ‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪U‬‬
‫‪U‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪U‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﺯﻧﺪﻩ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪DIS‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪ U‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺧﺎﺻﯽ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪٧٩‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﻭ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ………………… ‪٨١‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ………………………… ‪٩٨‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ……………………………… ‪٨١‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻳﻨﺪﻭﺯ …… ‪٩٩‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬
‫……………………………… ‪٨٨‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ……………………………………… ‪٩٠‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ …………………………… ‪٩٢‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ………………………………… ‪٩٣‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ …………………………… ‪٩٣‬‬
‫ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ………………………………… ‪٩۴‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺵ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ………………………… ‪٩۴‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ …………………… ‪٩۵‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ………………………………… ‪٩۵‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺵ ﭼﺎپ )‪٩٧ …………………… (DPOF‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪Intelli-studio‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺷﺪﻧﯽ ……………………………… ‪١٠٢‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ )ﺑﺮﺍی ‪١٠٣ ……… (Windows XP‬‬
‫……… ‪١٠٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﮑﻴﻨﺘﺎﺵ‬
‫ﭼﺎپ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﻋﮑﺲ )‪(PictBridge‬‬
‫… ‪١٠۴‬‬
‫…… ‪١٠۵‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﻭ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﭘﺨﺶ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ‪،‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٨۴‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‪ ← m ،‬ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ← ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻭﺏ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ‪ ← m ،‬ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ← ﻳﮏ ﻭﺏ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪٨١‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﮐﻨﺎﺭ ﺯﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﮐﺞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٨٢‬‬
‫• ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻟﺒﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻌﺪی‪ ،‬ﻟﻐﺰﺍﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻜﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ °٩٠ ،‬ﻳﺎ ‪ °١٨٠‬ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١٣٢‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‪ m ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪٨٢‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺭﺗﺒﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺗﺒﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ‬
‫ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ← m ،‬ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺭﺗﺒﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ‬
‫)‪ ،(Thumbnail‬ﺑﺎ ﻟﻤﺲ ‪ ← m‬ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﻬﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ (٩٠‬ﻳﺎ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻮﺗﯽ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٩٢‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ‪ -‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺕ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺵ ﭼﺎپ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ )‪(DPOF‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٨٧‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺟﺎﺭی ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ‪Facebook‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٨۶‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ m ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪٨٣‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﺗﺒﻪ ﻳﮏ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ o ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫← ﺑﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻟﻤﺲ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺭﺗﺒﻪ‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﻳﮏ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ‪ o‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫← ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺪﺗﯽ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﮑﺸﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﮏ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪٨۴‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻌﺪی‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺗﺮ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺗﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻗﻠﻢ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺸﻴﺪﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫• ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺳﻪ ﺑُﻌﺪی‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻳﺎ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ‪) 3D‬ﺳﻪ ﺑُﻌﺪی( ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪٨۵‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺗﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻌﺪی‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﮑﺚ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺻﺪﺍ‪،‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎی ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻢ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺟﺎﺭی ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ‪Facebook‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ )‪ ٩‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ(‪] ،‬ﺯﻭﻡ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﮐﻮﭼﮏ )‪ ١۶‬ﻳﺎ ‪ ٣۶‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ(‪] ،‬ﺯﻭﻡ[ ﺭﺍ ﻳﮏ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎی ﻗﺒﻠﯽ‪] ،‬ﺯﻭﻡ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪٨۶‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻓﯽ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ‪m‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮑﯽ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪﺷﻮ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺗﮑﯽ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻥ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﺎ ﻟﻤﺲ ‪ ← m‬ﺣﺬﻑ ← ﺣﺬﻑ ← ‪ o‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻳﺎ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮑﺒﺎﺭﻩ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪٨٧‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻥ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮑﺒﺎﺭﻩ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ← m ،‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻟﻤﺲ‬
‫‪ ← m‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺨﺸﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺰﺭگ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺨﺸﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺲ‪] ،‬ﺯﻭﻡ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪] .‬ﺯﻭﻡ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ‪ o‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻥ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﭙﯽ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﮐﭙﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ m ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻟﻤﺲ‬
‫‪ ← m‬ﮐﭙﯽ ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﮐﭙﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﭙﯽ ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻥ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪٨٨‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺵ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ )ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺯﻭﻡ )ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻳﮏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻳﺎ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺟﺎی ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻟﻐﻮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ‪ ٢,٠٠٠‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ o‬ﺭﺍ ﳌﺲ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ m‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻫﻤﻪ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪٨٩‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫* ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺗﮏ ﭘﺨﺸﯽ*‪ ،‬ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ(‬
‫ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ 1‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ*‪ 3 ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‪ 5 ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‪ 10 ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ(‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ "ﺟﻠﻮﻩ" ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‪ :‬ﺻﺪﺍی ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ*‪ ،‬ﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﮏ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯی‪ ،‬ﺳﻔﺮ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﺰ(‬
‫ﺍﻓﮑﺖ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ*‪ ،‬ﺁﺭﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺧﺸﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺁﺳﻮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺩﺍﺏ‪ ،‬ﺷﻴﺮﻳﻦ(‬
‫•‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻟﻐﻮ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ‪ ١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﭙﺮﺩﺍﺯﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺨﺸﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺑﺨﺸﻬﺎی ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﮑﺚ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺻﺪﺍ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﻣﮑﺚ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻄﻊ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪٩٠‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺵ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺵ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫←‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺵ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻪ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺸﻴﺪﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺭﻭی ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺮﺵ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﻗﺼﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻥ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻥ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻃﻮﻝ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ‪ ١٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪٩١‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‪،‬‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﻣﮑﺚ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻄﻊ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﮑﺚ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻄﻊ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪٩٢‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻨﺘﺮ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﻣﯽ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻨﺘﺮ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ m ،‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ o ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١٢٩‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬
‫‪2688 X 1512‬‬
‫‪1920 X 1080‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪٩٣‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺵ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ m ،‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﺮﺧﺶ‬
‫ﭼﺮﺧﺶ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ˚‪90‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﺷﻴﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻭ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺑﺮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺵ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ m ،‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺵ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ‪ ۴ ،‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺸﻴﺪﻥ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﭗ ˚‪90‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ o ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﻮﻳﺴﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ o ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪٩۴‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ‪ ،‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﺛﺮ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺘﺮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭﻟﯽ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻨﺘﺮ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ‪،‬‬
‫• ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ← ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ‪ ،‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ‬
‫ﻫﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ‪ ،ACB‬ﺭﻭﺗﻮﺵ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ← m‬ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ٧٣‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺎ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﻨﻴﺎﺗﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ‪ ،‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ← ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ← m‬ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ V ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪٩۵‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺰﻧﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ V ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ )‪(ACB‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺗﻮﺵ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫• ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ← ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ← m‬ﺭﺗﻮﺵ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺰﻧﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺟﻠﺪ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻤﭽﻨﺎﻧﮑﻪ ﻟﻐﺰﺍﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﭘﻮﺳﺖ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺘﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ← ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ACB ← m‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ V ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪٩۶‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ V ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﺭﻓﻊ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﻫﺎ‪/ ،‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ‪ o‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫• ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ← ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ← m‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ V ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻐﺎﺯﻩ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﭼﺎپ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ‪) DPOF‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ‬
‫ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺵ ﭼﺎپ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ( ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ ،DPOF‬ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭼﺎپ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﮐﻨﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎی ﭼﭗ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭼﺎپ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ‪ ،‬ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ‪ DPOF‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺵ ﭼﺎپ )‪(DPOF‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭼﺎپ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﭼﺎپ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ‬
‫ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺵ ﭼﺎپ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ )‪ (DPOF‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﭼﺎپ ﺩﺭ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮﻫﺎی‬
‫ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ ،DPOF‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ‪ MISC‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ m ،‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪ DPOF‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪٩٧‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪) A/V‬ﺻﺪﺍ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮ ← ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺸﻮﺭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١٣٠‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﻳﺰ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺨﺸﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ‬
‫ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،A/V‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﭘﺨﺶ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪٩٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻳﻨﺪﻭﺯ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻳﻨﺪﻭﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Intelli-studio‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪی ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫•‬
‫ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪی ﻫﺎ‬
‫•‬
‫‪ ٣/٢ ،Intel Pentium 4‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‪/‬‬
‫ﺳﯽ ﭘﯽ ﻳﻮ )‪(CPU‬‬
‫‪ ٢/۶ AMD Athlon™ FX‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ‪ ۵١٢‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ‪RAM‬‬
‫ﺭﻡ )‪(RAM‬‬
‫)‪ ١‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫‪ ،Windows Vista ،Windows XP SP2‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫‪) Windows 7‬ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﻫﺎی ‪ ٣٢‬ﺑﻴﺘﯽ(‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻫﺎﺭﺩ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ‪ ٢۵٠‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ )‪ ١‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮ ﺳﯽ ﺩی‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ‪ 1024 X 768‬ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻧﮕﯽ‬
‫‪ ١۶‬ﺑﻴﺘﯽ )‪ 1280 X 1024‬ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻧﮕﯽ‬
‫‪ ٣٢‬ﺑﻴﺘﯽ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ‪USB 2.0‬‬
‫‪ nVIDIA Geforce 7600GT‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‪/‬ﺳﺮی‬
‫‪ ATI X1600‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‬
‫‪ Microsoft DirectX 9.0c‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‬
‫* ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﻫﺎی ‪ ۶۴‬ﺑﻴﺘﯽ ‪ ،Windows Vista ،Windows XP‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ Windows 7‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﮑﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪٩٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪی ﻫﺎ ﺻﺮﻓﺎً ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩی ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪی ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻝ ﺭﻭﺑﺮﻭ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪی ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﻜﺸﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ DirectX 9.0c‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﺬ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺎﻥ‬
‫‪ Windows XP، Windows Vista‬ﻳﺎ ‪ Windows 7‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺒﺎﻝ ﺁﺳﻴﺒﻬﺎی ﻧﺎﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻧﺎﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻫﻴﭽﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺘﯽ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻳﻨﺪﻭﺯ‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪Intelli-studio‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫‪ Intelli-studio‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﺯﺷﻮ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ‪،‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫‪ Intelli-studio‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪PC‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،USB‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻣﻘﺼﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪی ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﺯﺷﻮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻫﺎی ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ‪ Windows Vista‬ﻭ ‪ ،Windows 7‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪،Intelli-studio‬‬
‫‪ Run iStudio.exe‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻨﺠﺮۀ ‪ AutoPlay‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎی ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ )‪ (S‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺮﻋﮑﺲ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻫﻴﭽﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺘﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪١٠٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻳﻨﺪﻭﺯ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪Intelli-studio‬‬
‫‪ Intelli-studio‬ﻳﮏ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ‪ Help → Help‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﻣﻨﺪی ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺘﻬﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ‪ Intelli-studio‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫‪ Web Support “ Update Intelli-studio “ Start Update‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪ Web Support “ Upgrade firmware for the connected device‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ Intelli-studio‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺘﺮ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪ Tool “ Install Intelli-studio on PC ،‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Intelli-studio‬ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪) MP4 :‬ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ‪ ،H.264 :‬ﺻﺪﺍ‪(MJPEG) AVI ،(WMV 7/8/9) WMV ،(AAC :‬‬‫‪ -‬ﻋﮑﺲ‪TIFF ،PNG ،BMP ،GIF ،JPG :‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪%‬‬
‫‪$‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪#‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫@‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫!‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪١٠١‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻳﻨﺪﻭﺯ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ﺟﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻧﯽ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک )ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺏ ﺳﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ‪ Flickr‬ﻳﺎ ‪(YouTube‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫ﺑﺰﺭگ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪PC‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،USB‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎی ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ )‪ (S‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺮﻋﮑﺲ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻫﻴﭽﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺘﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫!‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻴﻨﻴﺎﺗﻮﺭی ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭی ﻧﻘﺸﻪ‬
‫@‬
‫ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫‪#‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫‪$‬‬
‫ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻌﺪی‬
‫‪%‬‬
‫ﭼﺎپ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ‪ ،‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺛﺒﺖ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪١٠٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻳﻨﺪﻭﺯ‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ )ﺑﺮﺍی ‪(Windows XP‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺩﺭ ‪ Windows Vista‬ﻭ ‪ Windows 7‬ﻳﮑﺴﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﺯﺷﻮ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ‪My Computer → Removable Disk → ،‬‬
‫‪ DCIM → 100PHOTO‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﺑﻤﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺯﺷﻮ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺍﻳﻤﻦ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻛﻪ ‪ Intelli-studio‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻳﻤﻦ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪١٠٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﮑﻴﻨﺘﺎﺵ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﮑﻴﻨﺘﺎﺵ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍی‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Mac OS 10.4‬ﻳﺎ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺗﺮ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ‪ Macintosh‬ﻭﺻﻞ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎی ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ )‪ (S‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺮﻋﮑﺲ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻫﻴﭽﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺘﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻭ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ‬
‫ﺟﺪﺍﺷﺪﻧﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﺯﺷﻮ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪١٠۴‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ﺟﺪﺍﺷﺪﻧﯽ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﺎپ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﻋﮑﺲ )‪(PictBridge‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ ،PictBridge‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﭼﺎپ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ← ‪ ← USB‬ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻪ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﻭﺻﻞ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ‪ [POWER] ،‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫]ﭘﺨﺶ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫• ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﭼﺎپ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﭼﺎپ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺟﻬﺖ ﭼﺎپ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﻫﺎ‪/ ،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﭼﺎپ‪ m ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١٠۶‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪١٠۵‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻥ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﭼﺎپ ﺑﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﻟﻐﻮ ﭼﺎپ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﺯﺷﻮ‪ ،‬ﻟﻐﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﺎپ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﻋﮑﺲ )‪(PictBridge‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭼﺎپ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﭼﺎپ ‪ m‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﭼﺎپ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی‪ :‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ﭼﺎپ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ‪ :‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ‪ :‬ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﭼﺎپ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ :‬ﭼﺎپ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‪ :‬ﭼﺎپ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻌﻀﯽ ﺍﺯ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﮑﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪١٠۶‬‬
‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺤﻠﯽ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ )‪ WLAN‬ﻫﺎ( ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ‪ WLAN‬ﻭ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ … ‪١٠٨‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ‪١٠٨ ………………………… WLAN‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻫﻤﻪ ‪١١٨ …………………………… AllShare‬‬
‫………………………… ‪١٠٩‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪١١٨ …… I‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ‪١٠٩ …………………………… IP‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪١٢٠ …… II‬‬
‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ …………………… ‪١١٠‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ‪١٢١‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ……………………………… ‪١١١‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ …… ‪١٢١‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ …………………………… ‪١١١‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ …… ‪١٢١‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ …………………………… ‪١١٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ Auto Backup‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫‪١٢٣‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ………………………………… ‪١١۴‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ‪Auto Backup‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ………………………… ‪١٢٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ………… ‪١٢٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ‪١٢۴ ………………………… Blu-ray‬‬
‫…………………………………… ‪١١۶‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ )‪١٢۵ ………… Wake on LAN(WOL‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻜﺲ …………… ‪١١۵‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ …………………………… ‪١١۵‬‬
‫ﺁﭘﻠﻮﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ………………………… ‪١١۵‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﻫﺎﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ‪ WLAN‬ﻭ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬
‫ﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﻳﮏ ‪ WLAN‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻳﮏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ )‪ (AP‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ‪WLAN‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ‪،‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫‪ AP‬ﻭﻳﮋﻩ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ AP‬ﺍﻳﻤﻦ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪WPS AP‬‬
‫• ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎی ‪ AP‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ‪ AP‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ‪AP‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ‪WPS AP‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﺪﻳﺪ ‪ AP‬ﻫﺎی ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪AP‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ‪ AP‬ﺍﻳﻤﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﺯﺷﻮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ‪ WLAN‬ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ١١۴‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ‪ AP‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻤﻦ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ‪ WLAN‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪ AP‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ ،WPS‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ‬
‫‪ WPS PIN‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﭘﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ AP‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻟﻤﺲ ‪ WPS PBC‬ﺭﻭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ WPS‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ AP‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ‪ AP‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫‪ ،WPS‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Samsung 1‬‬
‫‪Samsung 2‬‬
‫‪Samsung 3‬‬
‫‪Samsung 4‬‬
‫‪Samsung 5‬‬
‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ‪١٠٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ‪ WLAN‬ﻭ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ‪،‬‬
‫‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎی ‪ AP‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻨﺎﺭ ﻳﮏ ‪ AP‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻫﺮ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺮﺍﺯ ﻫﻮﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰﻧﮕﺎﺭی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪IP‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ‪IP‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺣﺮﺍﺯ ﻫﻮﻳﺖ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻧﮕﺎﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ‪ IP‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎی ‪ AP‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪،‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻫﺮ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫‪IP‬‬
‫ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ‪ IP‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Subnet mask‬ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Gateway‬ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ‪ DNS‬ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Gateway‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ‪DNS‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ‪١٠٩‬‬
‫ﮐﻨﺎﺭ ﻳﮏ ‪ AP‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪ ← IP‬ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Subnet Mask‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﺭ‪ o ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ o ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ‪ WLAN‬ﻭ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬
‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ‪ AP‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺮﭼﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻭ ‪ AP‬ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻝ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﺎﻡ ‪ AP‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﯽ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻭ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﭘﺮﺳﺖ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﮏ ‪ WLAN‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﺣﺮﺍﺯ ﻫﻮﻳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ‪ ،WLAN‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺣﺮﺍﺯ ﻫﻮﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ‪ WLAN‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ‪ WLAN‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ‪ AP‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺮﭼﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻭ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺴﺘﻠﺰﻡ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺧﺖ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺩﺍﺩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻓﺮﻕ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ WLAN‬ﻫﺎی ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ‬
‫‪ WLAN‬ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺘﯽ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺵ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻘﻨﺎﻣﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺏ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺸﻮﺭﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻓﺮﻕ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ‪ WLAN‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺼﻮﻝ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭی‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ‪ WLAN‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫ﮐﺸﻮﺭی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﺍﺭی ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻭ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﭘﺮﺳﺖ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻓﺮﻕ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﺸﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ‪ DHCP‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ autoip. txt‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﭙﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ IP‬ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ‪١١٠‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻳﺎ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻫﺎی ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺧﻮﺩ‪o ،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ o ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺧﻮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ← m‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ o ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ‪،‬‬
‫‪ ← m‬ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺁﺩﺭﺳﻬﺎی ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ‪١١١‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﻧﺎﻡ‪ o ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‪o ،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ o ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ‪،‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻳﮏ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ← m‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ‪ ۴‬ﺭﻗﻤﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ۴‬ﺭﻗﻤﯽ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺟﻬﺸﯽ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻤﺎﻳﻠﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻤﺲ ‪ ،m‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺟﻬﺸﯽ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ‪ ۴‬ﺭﻗﻤﯽ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺟﻬﺸﯽ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ‪١١٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ‪ o‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ‪ ٢٠‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﮐﻠﯽ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺧﻮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫‪ o‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻼ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺒ ً‬
‫ﺩﺭﺝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١١١‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪ o‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‪o ،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺧﻮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١١١‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ‪ ٩‬ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﻳﮏ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‪،‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ o ،‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺴﺐ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ١١۴‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ‪١١٣‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺳﻌﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ AP‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ‪ WLAN‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻼ ﺑﻪ ‪ WLAN‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫• ﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺒ ً‬
‫ﻫﺎی ‪ AP‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١٠٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺍی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﯽ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺧﻄﺎی ﻧﺎﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻫﺮﺯﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻳﺎﻓﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﻳﺮﻭﺍﻝ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻋﻜﺴﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻟﻤﺲ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﻣﺘﻦ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ ،ABC‬ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ ،١٢٣‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ ABC‬ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ”‪.“.com‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ ١٢٣‬ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﺮﻑ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ‪١١۴‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻜﺲ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﻬﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﺏ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺁﭘﻠﻮﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺏ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺳﻌﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ AP‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ‪ WLAN‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻼ ﺑﻪ ‪ WLAN‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫• ﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺒ ً‬
‫ﻫﺎی ‪ AP‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١٠٨‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ‪ o‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻨﺎﺳﻪ ﻭ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ o ،‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻼ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺏ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺒ ً‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ‪ ٢٠‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﮐﻠﯽ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺏ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ‪١١۵‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ‪ ٣٢٠‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪ ٣٠ ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﯽ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺁﭘﻠﻮﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﻳﺮﻭﺍﻝ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻋﮑﺲ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺧﻄﺎی ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﻧﺸﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻼﺵ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻭﺏ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮﮔﺬﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﻫﺎﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻳﮏ ‪ WLAN‬ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ﻳﺎﺏ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﻫﺎ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻫﺎی ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ‪ Galaxy S‬ﮐﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ‪ Android 2.2‬ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ‪ Android 2.1‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ‪ Android 2.2‬ﺍﺭﺗﻘﺎ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ‪ ٧ Galaxy Tab‬ﺍﻳﻨﭽﯽ ﻭ ‪ iPhone 4‬ﺑﺎ ‪ iOS 4.3‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ ،Samsung Apps‬ﺑﺎﺯﺍﺭ ‪ Android‬ﻳﺎ ‪ Apple App Store‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ﻳﺎﺏ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ iPhone‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﻓﺮﺩی ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪،‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﻭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪[POWER‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ﻳﺎﺏ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﻴﺮﺍً ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﮏ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ iPhone‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ‪١١۶‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺭﻫﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﮑﺲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ‪(640X480) VGA‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﻫﺎﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ‪ ٣٠‬ﻓﻮﺗﯽ ) ‪ ١٠‬ﻣﺘﺮی(‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﺪﺗﯽ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻫﺎ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ﻳﺎﺏ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬‫ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬‫ ﭘﺮ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬‫ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ‪WLAN‬‬‫ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺎﭘﺎﻳﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬
‫ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺯﺗﺎﺑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ؛‬
‫ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ‪١١٧‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻫﻤﻪ ‪AllShare‬‬
‫‪ AllShare‬ﻳﮏ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻠﯽ ﻓﻨﺎﻭﺭی ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻨﺎﻭﺭی‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻔﺮﺳﺘﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪I‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻧﯽ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ‪AllShare‬‬
‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻫﺎی ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺳﻌﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ AP‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ‪ WLAN‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻼ ﺑﻪ ‪ WLAN‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫• ﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺒ ً‬
‫ﻫﺎی ‪ AP‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١٠٨‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺴﺐ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺭﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ .(۵۵‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ‪ ۶۴٠‬ﻳﺎ ‪ ٣٢٠‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍً ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﻭﺍﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫‪ A/V‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪← m ،AllShare‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻳﮏ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ AP‬ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪AP‬‬
‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ‪١١٨‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻫﻤﻪ ‪AllShare‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ‪ ١,٠٠٠‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ‪ AP‬ﻓﺮﻕ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ‪ AllShare‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﮑﻪ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﻃﺒﻖ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺠﻢ‬
‫ﮐﻞ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻤﯽ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﮑﺸﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮﻋﺎﺩی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻼ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی(‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﻣﺜ ً‬
‫ﻓﺮﺽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻓﺮﺍﻳﻨﺪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻗﺪﺭی ﻭﻗﺖ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻛﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻋﻮﺽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﺗﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﺍﻳﻨﺪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺎﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ‪١١٩‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻫﻤﻪ ‪AllShare‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪II‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻭ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ‪ AllShare‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻋﻤﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺳﻌﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ AP‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ‪ WLAN‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻼ ﺑﻪ ‪ WLAN‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫• ﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺒ ً‬
‫ﻫﺎی ‪ AP‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١٠٨‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫‪ AllShare‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺍﻥ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻟﻐﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ‪١٢٠‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎی ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ‪ AllShare‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺩﺭﺝ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻫﺎی ﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻧﺎﮔﻬﺎﻧﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ‪ AllShare‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﮑﻪ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﻃﺒﻖ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺠﻢ‬
‫ﮐﻞ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻤﯽ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﮑﺸﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻳﮑﯽ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮﮔﺬﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺪﺕ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ‪/‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺎی ‪ Samsung‬ﮐﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻔﺮﺳﺘﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ‪،‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﮏ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪m ،‬‬
‫← ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻳﮏ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬
‫ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ "ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ" ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎی‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ‪ ۴‬ﺭﻗﻤﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ‪٢‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫• ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ‪١٢١‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‪" ،‬ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ" ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ‪ ۴‬ﺭﻗﻤﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺧﻴﺮﺍً ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﻨﺪﻩ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻭ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻧﺎﮔﻬﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﺎﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺎ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﺗﯽ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻗﺪﺭی ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﮑﺸﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻳﮑﯽ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬
‫ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﻬﺎی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ‪ ٣۵ ،‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ‪١٢٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ Auto Backup‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ‪ Blu-ray‬ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ‪ Auto Backup‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻳﻨﺪﻭﺯ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ‪ Auto Backup‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺨﺼﯽ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،USB‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Intelli-studio‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫• ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻮﺡ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ‪ Blu-ray‬ﻧﻴﺎﺯی ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﺗﮑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺧﻴﺮﺍً ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺟﻬﺸﯽ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ o ،‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ‪١٢٣‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ )‪ ،Wake on LAN(WOL‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١٢۵‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ‪ AP ،WLAN‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭی ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻝ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﮏ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﮔﻴﺮی ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻟﻐﻮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ‬
‫‪ Blu-ray‬ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﮐﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ Auto Backup‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ‪Blu-ray‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻠﻮ‪-‬ﺭی ﮐﻪ ﻫﺎﺭﺩ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪،‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫• ‪ AP‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ‪ Blu-ray‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ‬
‫‪ Blu-ray‬ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ‪ Blu-ray‬ﻭ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻥ ﻳﮏ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‪ Allow ،‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪Menu → Settings → Network ،Blu-ray‬‬
‫‪→ AllShare Server Management‬‬
‫→ ‪→ Device Access Control‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ‪ ،‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ‪ Blu-ray‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻃﻮﺭی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ‪ ،Blu-ray‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ Blu-ray‬ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ﺳﺨﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ‪Blu-ray‬‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ‪١٢۴‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ‪ Blu-ray‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ‪ IP‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‪،‬‬
‫‪Menu → Settings → Network → Network Setting‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ Blu-ray‬ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎی‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍً ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻋﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ‪ ۴‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ۵‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎی ‪ Samsung Blu-ray‬ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ‬
‫‪ Auto Backup‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ Blu-ray‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ‪ Auto Backup‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ‪ My Contents‬ﻳﺎ‬‫‪.My Device‬‬
‫ ﺍﺭﺗﻘﺎی ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‪.‬‬‫ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ )ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺕ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺿﺒﻂ‬‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻋﺎﺩی ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.(.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ﺳﺨﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺁﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ )‪Wake on LAN(WOL‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ‪ ،WOL‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺪﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺩﺭ ‪ ۵‬ﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﺧﻴﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻭﻣﻴﺰی ‪Samsung‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪) .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻳﮏ ﺗﮑﻪ ]‪ [All-In-One‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﻴﺪﺍﺭ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﺏ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ‪ Start‬ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ‪ Control Panel‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪:Windows 7‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ‪Network and Internet → Network and‬‬
‫‪ Sharing Center → Change adapter settings‬ﮐﻠﻴﮏ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪:Windows Vista‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ‪Network and Internet → Network and‬‬
‫‪Sharing Center → Manage network connections‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪:Windows XP‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی → ‪Network and Internet Connection‬‬
‫‪ Network Connection‬ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ‪ Local Area‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ‪Properties‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ‪ ← Configure‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ‪Power manage‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ← ‪Allow this device to wake‬‬
‫‪ the computer‬ﺭﺍ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ‪ o‬ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬
‫‪ F2‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ‪ BIOS‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ‪ Advanced → Power mangement Setup‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫‪ Resume on PME → Enabled‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ‪١٢۵‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ‪ F10‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ‪ Start‬ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ‪ Control Panel‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪:Windows 7‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ‪Network and Internet → Network and‬‬
‫‪ Sharing Center → Change adapter settings‬ﮐﻠﻴﮏ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪:Windows Vista‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ‪Network and Internet → Network and‬‬
‫‪Sharing Center → Manage network connections‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪:Windows XP‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی → ‪Network and Internet Connection‬‬
‫‪ Network Connection‬ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮﺭﻫﺎی ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ‪ Advanced‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ‪ WOL‬ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ )‪Wake on LAN(WOL‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺁﺗﺶ )‪ (Firewall‬ﻳﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ‪ ،WOL‬ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻳﮏ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﺎ‬
‫‪ LAN‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺭﻭی ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ‪ LAN‬ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‪-‬ﮐﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ -‬ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺪﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ‪ OVS‬ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮﺭﻫﺎی ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻬﺎی ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ‪WOL‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻧﺎﻣﻬﺎی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ‪ Wake on LAN ،Enable PME :‬ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬‬‫‪ -‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ‪ Magic packet ،Enable :‬ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪ BIOS‬ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩی ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺒﺎﻝ ﺁﺳﻴﺒﻬﺎی ﻧﺎﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪BIOS‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺘﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ‪١٢۶‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ………………………………………………… ‪١٢٨‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ …………………………………… ‪١٢٨‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍ ……………………………………………………… ‪١٢٩‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ……………………………………………… ‪١٢٩‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ……………………………………………………… ‪١٣٠‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ …………………………………………………… ‪١٣١‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﭙﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺍﻗﺎﻣﺖ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫‪Language‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ‪ o‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺯ‪/‬ﻣﺎﻩ‪/‬ﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍ‪ :‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١٢٩‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻝ‪/‬ﺭﻭﺯ‪/‬ﻣﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻝ‪/‬ﻣﺎﻩ‪/‬ﺭﻭﺯ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‪ :‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١٢٩‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١٣٠‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﭘﻴﺶ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺽ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١٣١‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪١٢٨‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫* ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ ،‬ﮐﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ*‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩ(‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﺑﻴﭗ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍی‪AF‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ‬
‫* ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪﺍی ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﻮﺩ‪) .‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ*(‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪(3 ،2 ،*1 ،‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ*‪(3 ،2 ،1 ،‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﻮﺩ‪) .‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ*(‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﻮﺩ‪) .‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ*(‬
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ*‪ :‬ﻫﻴﭻ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺷﺮﻭﻋﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻮﮔﻮ‪ :‬ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‪ :‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٩٣‬‬
‫• ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻣﺸﺒﮏ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪١٢٩‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﺑﻨﺪی ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‬
‫ﮐﻤﮏ ﮐﻨﺪ‪(+ ،X ،3 X 3 ،*2 X 2) .‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫* ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‪ ،‬ﺗﻴﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ*(‬
‫ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺣﺘﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎی ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﻳﯽ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺮژی‬
‫* ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ 0/5 ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ*‪ 1 ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‪ 3 ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ(‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﺎ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﮐﺎﺭی ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﻳﯽ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ*‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ(‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﻳﯽ ﺑﺮﻕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺍی ﺑﺠﺰ ]‪ [POWER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺘﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﻳﯽ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﮑﺮﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﻳﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪PC‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪١٣٠‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ :*NTSC‬ﺍﻳﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﺘﺤﺪﻩ ﺁﻣﺮﻳﮑﺎ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﻧﺎﺩﺍ‪ ،‬ژﺍﭘﻦ‪ ،‬ﮐﺮﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﮑﺰﻳﮏ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﻳﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪) PAL‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ‪ BDGHI‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ(‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﻟﻴﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺮﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﮋﻳﮏ‪ ،‬ﭼﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﻧﻤﺎﺭک‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﮕﻠﺴﺘﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﻨﻼﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻟﻤﺎﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﺘﺎﻟﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﮐﻮﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻟﺰی‪ ،‬ﻫﻠﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻴﻮﺯﻳﻠﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺮﻭژ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﭙﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﺋﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺋﻴﺲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﻳﻠﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺮﻭژ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﺎ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﻭﺻﻞ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ*‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Intelli-studio‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ*(‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ‬
‫* ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬
‫* ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ‪ MAC‬ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺳﺮﻳﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Language‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺘﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﮐﺸﻮﺭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﺳﻔﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺯﺩﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺭﻭﺯ‪/‬ﻣﺎﻩ‪/‬ﺳﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﻝ‪/‬ﺭﻭﺯ‪/‬ﻣﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﻝ‪/‬ﻣﺎﻩ‪/‬ﺭﻭﺯ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ*(‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﻧﺎﻣﮕﺬﺍﺭی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ‪ :‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ‪ 0001‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﺮی*‪ :‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪١٣١‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ‪ 100PHOTO،‬ﻭ ﻧﺎﻡ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‪.SAM_0001،‬ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﺯ ‪ SAM_0001‬ﺗﺎ ‪ SAM_9999‬ﻳﮑﯽ ﻳﮑﯽ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺍﺯ ‪ 100PHOTO‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 999PHOTO‬ﻳﮑﯽ‬
‫ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫‪ ٩,٩٩٩‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ )‪ ،(DCF‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺎﻣﮕﺬﺍﺭی ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻋﻤﺪﺍ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫* ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫* ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﻨﺪ‪) .‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ*(‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‪) .‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ*‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ(‬
‫• ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺣﮏ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﻀﯽ ﻣﺪﻟﻬﺎی ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺪﺭﺳﺘﯽ ﭼﺎپ ﻧﮑﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﻣﭗ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬
‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﯽ‪ ،‬ﻫﻴﭻ ﮐﺎﺭی ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻧﺪﺍﺩﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ 1 ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‪ 3 ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ*‪ 5 ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‪ 10 ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ(‬
‫• ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺷﻤﺎ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻧﻴﺰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‪ ،‬ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ‬
‫ﮐﺎﻟﻴﺒﺮﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪١٣٢‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﻬﺎی ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻤﮏ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬
‫ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ*(‬
‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﯽ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ(‪) .‬ﺧﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﻪ(‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻨﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﺭک‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺧﻄﺎﻫﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺯﺑﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ(‪) .‬ﺧﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﯽ(‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﻟﻴﺒﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺎﻥ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﺭﺳﺘﯽ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻄﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﮐﺴﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻄﺎ …………………………………………………… ‪١٣۴‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ …………………………………………… ‪١٣۵‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫………………………………………… ‪١٣۵‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ …………………………………… ‪١٣۶‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ …………………………………… ‪١٣٧‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ……………………………………………… ‪١٣٩‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ …………………………………… ‪١۴٣‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ……………………………………………… ‪١۴۶‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ …………………………………………… ‪١۵٠‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ………………………………………………… ‪١۵۵‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻄﺎ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻄﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺧﻄﺎ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻧﺎﻣﻮﻓﻖ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪DCF Full Error‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺎی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﯽ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩی‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺧﻄﺎ‬
‫• ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍً ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪ microSDHC ،microSD‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺳﻌﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺳﻌﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ‪ DCF‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ FAT‬ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ‪ Allshare‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻧﺎﻣﻮﻓﻖ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ‪Allshare‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ‬
‫ﮐﻠﻤﻪ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻧﺎﻣﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻏﻴﺮﺿﺮﻭﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻧﺎﻣﻮﻓﻖ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﻧﻔﺮ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻧﺎﻣﻮﻓﻖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ‪ AllShare‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪١٣۴‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩی‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﻭ ﺧﺸﮏ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻨﺰ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺯﺩﻭﺩﻥ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺑُﺮﺱ ﺩﻣﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻫﻢ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻗﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺗﻤﻴﺰﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﺗﮑﻪ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ﺗﻤﻴﺰﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺯﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻨﺰﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﻴﻨﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﮑﻞ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻫﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻧﻘﺺ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺭﻭی ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﻟﻨﺰ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻧﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺱ ﺩﻣﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪١٣۵‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺣﻞ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻨﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻣﮑﺎﻧﻬﺎی ﻧﺎﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﻮﺍی ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻣﺎی ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﮔﺮﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻠﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺟﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﮔﺮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻧﺎﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺗﺎﺑﺴﺘﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﮐﺎﺕ ﺧﺸﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﻫﺎی ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺣﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺟﺪی ﻧﺒﻴﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺮ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﮐﺜﻴﻒ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻧﺎﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺤﺮک‬
‫ﻭ ﺍﺟﺰﺍی ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮑﯽ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺳﻮﺧﺘﯽ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﻳﯽ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﮔﺎﺯﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﻨﻔﺠﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﻳﺎ ﺣﻤﻞ‬
‫ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺎﺭ ﮔﻠﻮﻟﻪ ﻧﻔﺘﺎﻟﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺣﻞ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺷﻦ ﻭ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺿﺪ ﺁﺏ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺧﻴﺲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‪ ،‬ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺣﻤﻞ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺧﻴﺲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺑﺮﺍی ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺗﯽ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺟﺎﺫﺏ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ژﻝ ﺳﻴﻠﻴﮑﻮﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎی ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺛﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﺸﺖ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﭙﻮﺳﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺟﺪی ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍً ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﯽ ﺳﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﯽ ﮔﺮﻡ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻗﻄﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺁﺏ ﺭﻭی ﻟﻨﺰ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺸﮑﻴﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ‪ ١‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺻﺒﺮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﻄﺮﺍﺕ ﺁﺏ ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺗﺸﮑﻴﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻫﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺫﺭﺍﺕ ﺻﺒﺮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪١٣۶‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻬﺎ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺗﮑﺎﻥ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺑﺪﻧﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺤﺮک ﺭﺍ ﻣﺴﺪﻭﺩ ﮐﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺷﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﻇﺮﻳﻔﯽ ﺗﺸﮑﻴﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺎﺏ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﺮﻭی‬
‫ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻧﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﻧﺰﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎﺳﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺗﻴﺰ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺷﻴﺎی‬
‫ﺷﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﺧﻂ ﻭ ﺧﺶ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻨﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻘﺺ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﻭ ﺧﺮﺍﺷﻴﺪﮔﯽ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﻨﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﭘﺮﺯ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻟﻨﺰ‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻧﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺨﻮﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻨﮑﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﮔﺮﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻋﺎﺩی ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻭ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮی ﺑﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﺮ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎﻫﺎی ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺗﯽ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﮑﺸﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﻗﺘﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺲ ﺩﻳﺪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎی ﺧﺮﺍﺑﯽ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻭ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻣﺎی ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﺑﺨﻮﺩ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺭﻧﮓ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻠﺰ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩی ﮐﻪ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﯽ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﺭﺵ ﭘﻮﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺰﻣﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻮﺭﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻮﺭﺍً ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﭘﺰﺷﮏ ﻣﺸﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺷﮑﺎﻑ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﻫﺎی ﻧﺎﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﯽ‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻪ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﻧﺎﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ‬
‫ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪ (Secure Digital) microSD‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪ (Secure Digital High) microSDHC‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪١٣٧‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺍﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﻫﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪ ١‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺘﯽ ‪microSD‬‬
‫ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬
‫*ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺧﻮﺏ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺏ‬
‫ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ‬
‫‪١١٩‬‬
‫‪٢٣٣‬‬
‫‪٣۴٣‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪١٣٣‬‬
‫‪٢۶٠‬‬
‫‪٣٨٠‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪١۵٩‬‬
‫‪٣١١‬‬
‫‪۴۵٨‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪١۶۶‬‬
‫‪٣٢٣‬‬
‫‪۴۶٩‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪٣١٩‬‬
‫‪۶٠٧‬‬
‫‪٨۵٨‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪۵٢٢‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪ 30‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ‪ 15‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬
‫‪٩۵۴‬‬
‫‪١,٣٣۶‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪٧۴٢‬‬
‫‪١,٣٣۶‬‬
‫‪١,٨٧٨‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪١,۵٨٢‬‬
‫‪٢,۵٠۵‬‬
‫‪٣,٠٠۶‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‬‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً‬
‫"‪١٣' ٠٨‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً‬
‫"‪١۴' ۵۵‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً‬
‫"‪٣۴' ۵۵‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ‬
‫ً"‪١٣۴' ٣۴‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً‬
‫"‪١٣۴' ٣۴‬‬
‫‬‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً‬
‫"‪٢٢' ۵٧‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً‬
‫"‪٢٨' ۵۴‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً‬
‫"‪۶۵' ۴٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ‬
‫"‪ً٢٣١' ١۴‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫* ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺷﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪١٣٨‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ‬
‫ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍً ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻭ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﻧﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﺮ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻢ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻴﻨﺪﺍﺯﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻧﻬﺎی ﻗﻮی ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﮐﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮑﯽ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻣﺎی ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺧﻮﺭﻧﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺁﻟﻮﺩﮔﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﮐﺜﻴﻒ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺁﻟﻮﺩﮔﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺷﮑﺎﻑ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺣﻤﻞ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﮐﻴﻒ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻳﺴﻴﺘﮥ‬
‫ﺳﺎﮐﻦ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻫﺎﺭﺩ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ﻳﺎ ﺳﯽ ﺩی‪/‬ﺩی ﻭی ﺩی ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﮔﺮﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻋﺎﺩی ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻧﻘﺺ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺗﺴﺖ‬
‫ﻼ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺍﺳﺖ(‬
‫)ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﮐﺎﻣ ً‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ‪،DIS‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺧﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻫﻴﭽﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺘﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ‪ ١١٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‪/‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ‪ ٢٢٠‬ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ‪ ١‬ﻭ ‪ ٢‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ‪ ۵‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ‪ ١‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ‪ Samsung‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ‪ ١‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٣‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻝ‬
‫‪BP85A‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻟﻴﺘﻴﻮﻡ‪-‬ﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺳﻠﻮﻝ‬
‫‪ ٨۵٠‬ﻣﻴﻠﯽ ﺁﻣﭙﺮ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ‬
‫‪ ٣/٧‬ﻭﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ*‬
‫)ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺍﺳﺖ(‬
‫ﺣﺪﻭﺩﺍ ‪ ١٨٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ‪ ٩٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ‪ 1280 X 720 HQ‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ 30‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎی ‪ Samsung‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺗﺮ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﮑﺸﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪١٣٩‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﮐﺎﻣﻼ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﮑﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‪ ،‬ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ‬
‫’ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺍﺳﺖ‘ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺭژﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻓﻠﺰی ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ‪ +‬ﻭ ‪ -‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﻣﻮﻗﺘﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻳﺎ ﺷﻮک ﺑﺮﻗﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﮑﺎﺗﯽ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﻮﺍی ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻣﺎﻫﺎی ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻡ )ﺯﻳﺮ ‪ ºF ٣٢/ºC ٠‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﻼی ‪ (ºF ١٠۴/ºC ۴٠‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻣﺎی ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﺮﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻋﺎﺩی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮی ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﺎ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﺮﻕ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻧﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺁﺗﺶ‬
‫ﺳﻮﺯی ﻳﺎ ﺷﻮک ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻳﮑﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ‪ ،ºF ٣٢/ºC ٠‬ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ‬
‫ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎﻫﺎی ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎی ﻣﻌﺘﺪﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩی ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﮑﺎﺗﯽ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪١۴٠‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﮐﺎﻣﻼ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺁﺗﺶ‬
‫ﺳﻮﺯی ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﻕ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﮕﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﺎ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﺮﻕ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻧﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺁﺗﺶ‬
‫ﺳﻮﺯی ﻳﺎ ﺷﻮک ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻳﮑﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ‪ ١٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺻﺒﺮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻧﯽ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻌﻀﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻧﺮژی ﺑﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﺪﻥ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻪ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺳﺒﺰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻧﺎﺭﻧﺠﯽ ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺍﻍ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻣﺎ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺍﻍ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻧﺎﺭﻧﺠﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﺧﻨﮏ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻢ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺣﻤﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﻴﻨﺪﺍﺯﻳﺪ‬
‫• ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺗﺶ ﻧﻴﻨﺪﺍﺯﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎی ﻣﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺤﻠﯽ ﭘﻴﺮﻭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭی ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﮔﺮﻣﺎﺯﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺍﺟﺎﻕ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻳﮑﺮﻭﻭﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺟﺎﻕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﺗﻮﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻡ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﮑﺎﺗﯽ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫• ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺎﺏ ‪ USB‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ‪ USB‬ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‬‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺟﻠﻮﻳﯽ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺑﺮﻕ )‪ ۵‬ﻭﻟﺖ‪ ۵٠٠ ،‬ﻣﻴﻠﯽ‬‫ﺁﻣﭙﺮ( ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪١۴١‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺑﺎ ﺑﯽ ﺩﻗﺘﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺟﺮﺍﺣﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺮگ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﭘﻴﺮﻭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﻔﺠﺮ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﮑﻞ‪ ،‬ﺷﮑﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻏﻴﺮﻋﺎﺩی‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺷﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺮﻡ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻧﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬
‫ﻫﺎی ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﮔﺮﻡ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺒﻴﻞ ﺩﺭﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺑﺴﺘﺎﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺟﺎﻕ ﻣﺎﻳﮑﺮﻭﻭﻳﻮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺮﻡ ﻭ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺳﻮﻧﺎ ﻭ ﺣﻤﺎﻡ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺭﺧﺘﺨﻮﺍﺏ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﺵ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﭘﺘﻮﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻗﯽ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺍی ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ‬
‫ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﻭ ﺳﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺑﺎ ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﻓﻠﺰی‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺒﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﮑﻪ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻟﻴﺘﻴﻮﻡ‪-‬ﻳﻮﻥ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﺗﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺮﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺷﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﻫﺎی ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎی ‪ ۶٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﮔﺮﻣﺎی ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﺗﺶ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻫﻨﻤﻮﺩﻫﺎی ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ‬
‫• ﺑﺎ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﻴﻨﺪﺍﺯﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺗﺶ ﻧﻴﻨﺪﺍﺯﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﺩﻓﻊ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﮐﺸﻮﺭ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺤﻠﯽ ﻭ ﻓﺪﺭﺍﻝ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﻓﻊ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻫﻨﻤﻮﺩﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻴﻮﻩ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺠﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪١۴٢‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺸﮑﻠﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺵ ﻫﺎی ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩی‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﻮﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺸﮑﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﻨﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﻠﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻤﺎً ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺍﺟﺰﺍﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‪ ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩی‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫• ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺑﺪﺭﺳﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١٨‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺎﮔﻬﺎﻥ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫• ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺷﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﻳﯽ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١٣٠‬‬
‫• ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺛﺮ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬
‫• ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎی ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬
‫)ﺯﻳﺮ ‪ (ºC ٠‬ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺗﺮ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺭ ﺟﻴﺐ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﮔﺮﻡ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻟﺰﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﺼﺮﻓﯽ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﮔﺬﺷﺖ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺯﻭﺩ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩی‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺟﺎی ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮﺿﺮﻭﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﻌﻴﻮﺏ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪی‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺎﮔﻬﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﯽ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﮔﺮﻡ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﮔﺮﻡ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻋﺎﺩی ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮی ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﺮ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬
‫• ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﻭی ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۵٧‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﻀﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪١۴٣‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩی‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻳﺴﻴﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﮐﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١٣١‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺏ ﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎﻫﺎی ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺧﻮﺏ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺎﺭﺍﻳﯽ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎﻫﺎی ﻣﻌﺘﺪﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺎﻳﯽ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫• ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻭ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍً ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ "ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﻫﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ" ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١٣٨‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ )ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ‪DCF‬‬
‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ(‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺘﯽ ﺭﻭﺑﺮﻭ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩی‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫• ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻠﻮﺯﺁپ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۶٠‬‬
‫• ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١٣۵‬‬
‫• ﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١۴۶‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺎ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ﻧﺎﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺭﻧﮕﯽ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٧٠‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۵٧‬‬
‫• ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪ ISO‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۵٩‬‬
‫• ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۶٨‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮐﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۵٧‬‬
‫• ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪ ISO‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۵٩‬‬
‫• ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۶٨‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪١۴۴‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩی‬
‫• ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪A/V‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‬
‫• ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩی‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬
‫• ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ‬
‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻗﻄﻊ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻳﺴﻴﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﮐﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺨﺘﻞ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﻀﯽ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪Intelli-studio‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١٠٠‬‬
‫‪ Intelli-studio‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪١۴۵‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Intelli-studio‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ Intelli-studio‬ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮﻫﺎی‬
‫‪ Macintosh‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻗﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪ PC‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪).‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١٣٠‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی “ ‪Start‬‬
‫“ ‪My Computer “ Intelli-studio‬‬
‫‪ iStudio.exe‬ﺩﺭ ﻳﺎﺭﺍﻧﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫‪) "١⁄٢/٣‬ﺣﺪﻭﺩﺍ ‪ ٧/٧۶‬ﻣﻴﻠﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ( ‪CCD‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺆﺛﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺪﻭﺩﺍ ‪ ١۴/٢‬ﻣﮕﺎﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ‬
‫ﮐﻞ ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺣﺪﻭﺩﺍ ‪ ١۴/۴٨‬ﻣﮕﺎﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺩ‬
‫ﻟﻨﺰ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮐﺎﻧﻮﻧﯽ‬
‫ﻟﻨﺰﻫﺎی ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮐﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ‪ ۴/٧-٢٣/۵ = Samsung‬ﻣﻴﻠﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫)ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪ ٣۵‬ﻣﻴﻠﯽ ﻣﺘﺮی‪ ٢۶-١٣٠ :‬ﻣﻴﻠﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ(‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ‪F-stop‬‬
‫‪) F۵/٩‬ﺗﻠﻪ( ‪) F٣/٣ -‬ﻭﺍﻳﺪ(‬
‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ ١/٠X :‬ﻳﺎ ‪۵/٠X‬‬
‫)ﺯﻭﻡ ﻧﻮﺭی ‪ x‬ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‪(٢۵/٠X :‬‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ١/٠X :‬ﻳﺎ ‪١۴/۴X‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻳﺪ )‪(W‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻪ )‪(T‬‬
‫ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ )ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ(‬
‫‪ ٨٠‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﺑﯽ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪ ١۵٠‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﺑﯽ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ‬
‫‪ ۵‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ ‪٨٠ -‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫‪ ١٠٠‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ‪١۵٠ -‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮐﻢ‬
‫‪ ۵‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﺑﯽ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪ ١٠٠‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﺑﯽ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫• ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‪ ١/٨-١/٢,٠٠٠ :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬
‫• ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪ ١-١/٢,٠٠٠ :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬
‫• ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺐ‪ ٨-١/٢,٠٠٠ :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪AE‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫‪TFT LCD‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺳﻨﺠﯽ‬
‫ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﮐﺰی‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ‬
‫‪ ٧/۶) " ٣/٠‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﺮی( ‪K ٢٣٠ WQVGA‬‬
‫ﺟﺒﺮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪) ±٢ EV‬ﮔﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ‪(١⁄٣ EV‬‬
‫‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‪،ISO 400 ،ISO 200 ،ISO 100 ،ISO 80 ،‬‬
‫‪ISO 3200 ،ISO 1600 ،ISO 800‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ‪) TTL‬ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻣﺮﮐﺰی‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ‪،AF‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ‪ ،AF‬ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﺴﮑﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺗﮏ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ‪(AF‬‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‪ ،‬ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺁﻫﺴﺘﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺩ‬
‫• ﻋﺮﻳﺾ‪ ٠/٢ :‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٣/٢‬ﻣﺘﺮ )‪ ISO‬ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ(‬
‫• ﺗﻠﻪ‪ ٠/۵ :‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ١/٨‬ﻣﺘﺮ )‪ ISO‬ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ(‬
‫ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺣﺪﻭﺩﺍ ‪ ۴‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪١۴۶‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻟﺮﺯﺷﮕﻴﺮ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪(DIS‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﻟﺮﺯﺷﮕﻴﺮ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ)‪(DIS‬‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫• ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻋﮑﺲ )ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ(‪) :‬ﻋﺎﺩی(‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﻨﻴﺎﺗﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺰﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻗﺪﻳﻤﯽ‪ ،1‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻗﺪﻳﻤﯽ‪ ،2‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﮐﻢ ﺭﻧﮓ‪ ،‬ﻃﺮﺡ‪،‬‬
‫ﭼﺸﻢ ﻣﺎﻫﯽ‪ ،‬ﺿﺪ ﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﮐﻼﺳﻴﮏ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻗﻬﻮﻩ ﺍی‪ ،‬ﻧﮕﺎﺗﻴﻮ‪،‬‬
‫)‪ RGB‬ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ(‬
‫• ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻭﺿﻮﺡ‪ ،‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ‬
‫• ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﭘﺎﻟﺖ‪ :‬ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﭘﺎﻟﺖ ‪ ،1‬ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﭘﺎﻟﺖ ‪،2‬‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﭘﺎﻟﺖ ‪ ،3‬ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﭘﺎﻟﺖ ‪4‬‬
‫• ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ )ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ(‪) :‬ﻋﺎﺩی(‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﻨﻴﺎﺗﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺰﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﮐﻢ ﺭﻧﮓ‪ ،‬ﻃﺮﺡ‪ ،‬ﭼﺸﻢ ﻣﺎﻫﯽ‪ ،‬ﺿﺪ ﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﮐﻼﺳﻴﮏ‪،‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻗﻬﻮﻩ ﺍی‪ ،‬ﻧﮕﺎﺗﻴﻮ‪ RGB) ،‬ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ(‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺮی‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺭ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‪ ،H-‬ﻧﻮﺭ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‪ ،L-‬ﺗﻨﮕﺴﺘﻦ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺯﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ & ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪١۴٧‬‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎ‪ :‬ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ*‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺻﺤﻨﻪ*‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺟﺎﺩﻭﻳﯽ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺒﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺷﻴﯽ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺐ‪،‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻮﺯﺁپ )ﻧﻤﺎی ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ(‪ ،‬ﺗﺰﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫* ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻦ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻔﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‪ ،‬ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‪ ،‬ﺷﺐ‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺐ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻧﻮﺭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﺁﺳﻤﺎﻥ ﺁﺑﯽ‪ ،‬ﺁﺳﻤﺎﻥ ﻏﺮﻭﺏ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﺎﮐﺮﻭ‪ ،‬ﺳﺒﺰ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﯽ‪ ،‬ﺁﺗﺶ ﺑﺎﺯی‬
‫* ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﻏﺮﻭﺏ ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﻃﻠﻮﻉ ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺏ‪،‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﺣﻞ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻑ‬
‫• ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﭘﻴﺎﭘﯽ‪ :‬ﺗﮑﯽ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﺍﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪AEB ،‬‬
‫• ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ‪ 2 :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‪ 10 ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺑﻞ )‪ ٢‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‪ ١٠ ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ(‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎ‪ :‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ*‪ ،‬ﺗﺰﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﭘﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫* ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‪ :‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺁﺳﻤﺎﻥ ﺁﺑﯽ‪ ،‬ﺳﺒﺰ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﯽ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪) (H.264) MP4 :‬ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٢٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ(‬
‫‪ 30) 1280 X 720 HQ‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‪ 15 ،‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ(‪،‬‬
‫‪ 30) 1280 X 720‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‪ 15 ،‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ(‪،‬‬
‫‪ 30) 640 X 480‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‪ 15 ،‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ(‪،‬‬
‫‪ 30) 320 X 240‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‪ 15 ،‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ(‪،‬‬
‫‪ 30) 320 X 240 WEB‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ(‬
‫ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ 30 :‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‪ 15 ،‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍ‪ :‬ﻗﻄﻊ ﺻﺪﺍ‪ Sound Alive ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪،‬‬
‫‪ Sound Alive‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ )ﮔﻨﺠﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ(‪ :‬ﻣﮑﺚ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺵ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ )ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ‪ ١٠‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ(‬
‫• ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ )ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ‪ ١٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ(‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺗﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﻭ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﮐﻠﻴﭗ‪ ،‬ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ*‪ ،‬ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی‪،‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎی ﺭﻭﺯﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍی‬
‫* ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‪ :‬ﻧﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺧﺶ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺁﺭﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺵ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫• ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﺭﺗﻮﺵ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ‪،‬‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ‪ACB ،‬‬
‫• ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‪ :‬ﻋﺎﺩی‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﻨﻴﺎﺗﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺰﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻗﺪﻳﻤﯽ‪ ،1‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻗﺪﻳﻤﯽ‪ ،2‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﮐﻢ ﺭﻧﮓ‪،‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﺡ‪ ،‬ﭼﺸﻢ ﻣﺎﻫﯽ‪ ،‬ﺿﺪ ﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﮐﻼﺳﻴﮏ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻗﻬﻮﻩ ﺍی‪،‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﺎﺗﻴﻮ‪ RGB ،‬ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﻭﺩﺍ ‪ ۶/٩‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ )ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭی(‪:‬‬
‫‪) microSD‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٢‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ(‪،‬‬
‫‪) microSDHC‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٨‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ(‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ‬
‫ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪١۴٨‬‬
‫‪PictBridge 1.0 ،DPOF 1.1 ،EXIF 2.21 ،DCF‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪(DCF) JPEG :‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﭗ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪) MP4 :‬ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ‪،MPEG-4.AVC/H.264 :‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍ‪(AAC :‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺻﺪﺍ‪WAV :‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ‪١‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ‪ :microSD‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪) PAL ،NTSC :A/V‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ(‬
‫ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺧﻮﺏ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺏ‬
‫ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ‬
‫‪4320 X 3240‬‬
‫‪١١٩‬‬
‫‪٢٣٣‬‬
‫‪٣۴٣‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺑﺮﻕ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬
‫‪ ٢٠‬ﭘﻴﻦ‪ ۴/٢ ،‬ﻭﻟﺖ‬
‫‪4320 X 2880‬‬
‫‪١٣٣‬‬
‫‪٢۶٠‬‬
‫‪٣٨٠‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺑﺮﻕ‬
‫‪4320 X 2432‬‬
‫‪١۵٩‬‬
‫‪٣١١‬‬
‫‪۴۵٨‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﺎﺭژ‬
‫‪3648 X 2736‬‬
‫‪١۶۶‬‬
‫‪٣٢٣‬‬
‫‪۴۶٩‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪2592 X 1944‬‬
‫‪٣١٩‬‬
‫‪۶٠٧‬‬
‫‪٨۵٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﻋﻤﻖ × ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﻋﺮﺽ(‬
‫‪1984 X 1488‬‬
‫‪۵٢٢‬‬
‫‪٩۵۴‬‬
‫‪١,٣٣۶‬‬
‫‪ ٩٣ X ۵٣/٩ X ١٨/٩‬ﻣﻴﻠﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺑﺮﺁﻣﺪﮔﯽ ﻫﺎ(‬
‫‪1920 X 1080‬‬
‫‪٧۴٢‬‬
‫‪١,٣٣۶‬‬
‫‪١,٨٧٨‬‬
‫ﻭﺯﻥ‬
‫‪1024 X 768‬‬
‫‪١,۵٨٢‬‬
‫‪٢,۵٠۵‬‬
‫‪٣,٠٠۶‬‬
‫‪ ١١٠/٢‬ﮔﺮﻡ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ(‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ‪ Samsung‬ﺫﮐﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻭ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Wireless network‬‬
‫‪ ،AllShare ،(IEEE 802.11 b/g/n) Wi-Fi‬ﺏﻭ‪ ،‬ﻞﻴﻤﻳﺍ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪،‬‬
‫‪ ،Auto Backup ،AP Connection‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ﻳﺎﺏ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺳﻂ‬
‫ﺩﻣﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ‬
‫‪ ٠‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ۴٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ‬
‫‪ ۵‬ﺗﺎ ‪٪ ٨۵‬‬
‫ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‬
‫‪PC Auto Backup ،Intelli-studio‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ‪USB 2.0‬‬
‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩی‪/‬ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻟﻴﺘﻴﻢ‪-‬ﻳﻮﻥ )‪ ٨۵٠ ،BP85A‬ﻣﻴﻠﯽ ﺁﻣﭙﺮ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ(‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮی ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ)ﻣﻮﻧﻮ(‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭﻓﻦ )ﻣﻮﻧﻮ(‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪١۴٩‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ‬
‫‪) ACB‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ(‬
‫ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﺑﻨﺪی‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﯽ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺨﺸﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﺑﻨﺪی ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﯽ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺷﻴﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ‬
‫ﺗﺒﻌﻴﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺳﻮﻡ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﺑﻨﺪی ﺧﻮﺏ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪) DCF‬ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ(‬
‫‪) AEB‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ(‬
‫ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺘﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻳﮏ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﺗﺤﺎﺩﻳﻪ ﺻﻨﺎﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮏ ﻭ ﻓﻨﺎﻭﺭی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ژﺍﭘﻦ )‪ (JEITA‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪) AF‬ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ(‬
‫ﻋﻤﻖ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮑﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺭﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻋﻤﻖ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﻟﻨﺰ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮐﺎﻧﻮﻧﯽ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺎ ﺳﻮژﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﻼ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻖ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﺑﻨﺪی ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺭی ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺭﺳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ )ﺗﺎﺭی(‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺗﮑﺎﻥ ﺑﺨﻮﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﺎﺭ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺸﮑﻞ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺁﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ‪ DIS‬ﻳﺎ ‪ OIS‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻟﻨﺰﻫﺎی ﺯﻭﻡ )ﺯﻭﻡ ﻧﻮﺭی( ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻨﻮﻋﯽ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ‪ ،‬ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪) DPOF‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺵ ﭼﺎپ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ(‬
‫ﻗﺎﻟﺒﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﭼﺎپ‪ ،‬ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﭼﺎپ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪ .‬ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮﻫﺎی ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ ،DPOF‬ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭ ﭼﺎپ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪١۵٠‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ‬
‫‪) EV‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ(‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮐﺎﻧﻮﻧﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﻟﻨﺰ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﻳﮑﺴﺎﻥ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﻂ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﮐﺎﻧﻮﻧﯽ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ )ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻴﻠﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ(‪ .‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﮐﺎﻧﻮﻧﯽ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎی ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺗﺮ ﻧﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﺎﻧﻮﻧﯽ ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎی ﺑﺎﺯﺗﺮ ﻧﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎی ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﮏ ﻭﺍﺣﺪی ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮑﯽ‪ ،‬ﺟﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ‪ ،EV ١٫٠-‬ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﮏ ﻭﺍﺣﺪی ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ‪ EV ١٫٠‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻴﺴﺘﻮﮔﺮﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺟﺒﺮﺍﻥ ‪EV‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﮑﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩی‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ )ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ( ﻭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫)ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ( ﻫﻴﺴﺘﻮﮔﺮﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Exif‬ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺩﻟﻪ(‬
‫ﺧﺺ ﻳﺼﻮﺗﯽ ﺍ ﺗﺴﮑﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻊ ﻳﻴﻦ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻳﺎﻑ ﻝ ﺗﺺ ﺭﻳﻮی ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻩ ی ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺕ ﺳﻮﻁ ﺍﺗﺤﺎﺩﻳﻪ ﺕ ﺳﻮﻋﻪ ﺹ ﻥ ﻳﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮏ )‪ (JEIDA‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍ ﺗﺲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺭی ﮐﻪ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺒﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﻭ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪ ISO‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪H.264/MPEG-4‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﯽ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻠﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ‪ ISO-IEC‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ ITU-T‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺪک ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺮﺥ ﺑﻴﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ‪ (JVT) Joint Video Team‬ﺗﻮﺳﻌﻪ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﮐﻢ ﻧﻮﺭ ﮐﻤﮏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﺰﻳﮑﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﮐﻪ ﺣﺎﻭی ﻓﺘﻮﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻫﺮ ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ ﺭﻭی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﻓﺘﻮﺳﺎﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻧﻮﺭی ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﺒﺖ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ‪) CCD :‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ( ﻭ ‪CMOS‬‬
‫)ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﺎی ﻣﮑﻤﻞ ﺍﮐﺴﻴﺪ ﻓﻠﺰی(‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪١۵١‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪ISO‬‬
‫‪ JPEG) MJPEG‬ﻣﺘﺤﺮک(‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ(‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪ ،ISO‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺗﺎﺭی ﻧﺎﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺭ ﮐﻢ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ‬
‫ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮﭼﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺯﻳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ JPEG‬ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪) JPEG‬ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻣﺸﺘﺮک ﮐﺎﺭﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻥ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ(‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﻓﺖ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫‪ JPEG‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﺣﺠﻢ ﮐﻠﯽ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺍﻓﺖ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺯﻳﺖ‬
‫ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺯﺍﻳﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻓﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺯﻳﺖ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﻧﻮﺭی‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻳﮏ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺣﻔﻆ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪) LCD‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﮐﺮﻳﺴﺘﺎﻝ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ(‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮑﯽ ﻣﺼﺮﻓﯽ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻣﺠﺰﺍ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ‪ CCFL‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪ LED‬ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻧﺮﺥ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮی‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﻧﺮﺥ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ﮐﻤﺘﺮی ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ )ﻣﺎﮐﺮﻭ(‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﻧﻤﺎی‬
‫ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ )ﻣﺎﮐﺮﻭ(‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ﻃﺒﻴﻌﯽ )‪(١:١‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮی ﺑﺎ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی‬
‫ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻠﻬﺎی ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮی ﺑﺎ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺟﺰﻳﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺳﻨﺠﯽ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺳﻨﺠﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﯽ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪١۵٢‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﺸﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻭ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭ ﭼﻮﻥ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻥ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺭی ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻬﻤﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮐﻤﺘﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﺗﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﺗﺮ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﯽ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﺸﻤﮕﻴﺮ )‪(Vignetting‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ ﻫﺎی )ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ( ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﭼﺸﻤﮕﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻴﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺟﻠﺐ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی )ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺭﻧﮕﯽ(‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﺕ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‪ ،‬ﺳﺒﺰ ﻭ ﺁﺑﯽ(‪ .‬ﻫﺪﻑ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺭﻧﮕﯽ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪١۵٣‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫)ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺤﺎﺩﻳﻪ ﺍﺭﻭﭘﺎ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﮐﺸﻮﺭﻫﺎی ﺍﺭﻭﭘﺎﻳﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﻣﺠﺰﺍی ﺟﻤﻊ ﺁﻭﺭی ﺑﺎﺗﺮی(‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫)ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻗﯽ ﻭ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮑﯽ ﺯﺍﻳﺪ(‬
‫)ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺤﺎﺩﻳﻪ ﺍﺭﻭﭘﺎ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﮐﺸﻮﺭﻫﺎی ﺍﺭﻭﭘﺎﻳﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﺟﻤﻊ ﺁﻭﺭی ﻣﺠﺰﺍی ﺯﺑﺎﻟﻪ(‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭی ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻋﻤﺮ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺯﺑﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺯﻳﺴﺖ ﻭ ﺳﻼﻣﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﺩﻓﻊ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺯﺑﺎﻟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺯﺑﺎﻟﻪ ﺟﺪﺍ‬
‫ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺭﺗﻘﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﯽ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻌﻬﺪﺍﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺍﻥ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﺩﻭﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺤﻠﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻭ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﻓﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻤﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺯﻳﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﮐﺴﺐ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺍﻥ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻣﻔﺎﺩ ﻭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺩﺍﺩ ﺧﺮﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺯﺑﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﻣﺨﻠﻮﻁ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‪ ،‬ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻋﻤﺮ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺯﺑﺎﻟﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺎی ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﺟﺎ ﮐﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫‪ Hg، Cd‬ﻳﺎ ‪ Pb‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺣﺎﻭی ﺟﻴﻮﻩ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺩﻣﻴﻢ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺮﺏ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ‪ 2006/66‬ﮐﻤﻴﺴﻴﻮﻥ ﺍﺭﻭﭘﺎﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻪ ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻼﻣﺖ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺯﻳﺴﺖ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﯽ ﻭ ﺗﺮﻭﻳﺞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺯﺑﺎﻟﻪ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﺤﻠﯽ ﻭ ﺭﺍﻳﮕﺎﻥ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺁﻭﺭی‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ PlanetFirst‬ﺗﻮﺳﻌﻪ ‪ Samsung Electronic‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺗﻌﻬﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻬﺪ ﭘﺎﻳﺪﺍﺭ ﻭ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺖ ﭘﺬﻳﺮی ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﮐﺴﺐ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬
‫ﺯﻳﺴﺖ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻭ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺘﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪١۵۴‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺍ‬
‫ﺏ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫‪١٠۴ Mac‬‬
‫‪٩٩ Windows‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ﻳﺎﺏ ‪١١۶‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺶ ‪٢٣‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ‪٢٣‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻥ ‪٢٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪٩۵‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪٧۶‬‬
‫ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ‪٨۴‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺷﺎﺭژ ‪١٩‬‬
‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ‪١۴٠‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ‪١٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪٧۶‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪٩۵‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪۶٨‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪٩۵‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪١٣١‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی ‪١۵‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ‪٩٧‬‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺰﺭگ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ‪٨٨‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ‪٧۶‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺵ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ‪٩۴‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪٧۶‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ‪١٣٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ‪٢۵‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪١٢٨‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭘﻠﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ ‪۶۵‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ‪١٣١ ،٢٠‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ‪۶٣‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ‪١٣١‬‬
‫ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ‪١۵ USB‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ‪٨٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﺪﺍ ‪٢۵‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻄﺎ ‪١٣۴‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ‪۶۵‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ‪١٣١ ،٢٠‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ‪٨۴‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ )‪(ACB‬‬
‫پ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪١٠۴ Mac‬‬
‫‪١٢٣ AutoBackup‬‬
‫‪٩٩ Windows‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ‪١١١‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪١٢١‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺍﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪١٣۵‬‬
‫ﻟﻨﺰ ‪١٣۵‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ‪١٣۵‬‬
‫ﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ‬
‫ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ‪١۶‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ‪١٢٩ ،٩٣‬‬
‫ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪٩٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۵٣‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪١۵۵‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪٩۶‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۶٨‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ‪٧٠‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺝ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ‪٣٧‬‬
‫ﺩ‬
‫ﺯ‬
‫ﺟﺪﺍﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪١٠٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﭘﺎﻟﺖ ‪۴٩‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ‪١٣٢ ،٢١‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ‪٣٠‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺷﺐ ‪٣٩‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﮔﺎﻩ ‪١۶ A/V‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ‪٣١‬‬
‫چ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ‪٣٨‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪١٧ Home‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻡ‬
‫ﭼﺎپ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ‪١٠۵‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﻳﯽ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ‪١٣٠‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪١٧‬‬
‫ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪AF‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ‪١۶‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪١٣٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ‪۶۴‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪-‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ‪١٧‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺟﺎﺩﻭﻳﯽ ‪۴۵‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ‪١۶‬‬
‫ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ‪١٧‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻋﮑﺲ ‪۴۵‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ‪٣٣‬‬
‫ﺵ‬
‫ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ‪٩۴‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪۴٧‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪۴٠‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ‪١٩‬‬
‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ‪١٠٨‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ‪۴٢‬‬
‫ﺡ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ‪٣۶‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺷﯽ ‪۴۴‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪۴٠‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ‬
‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ‪٧٢‬‬
‫ﮐﺮﻭﺷﻪ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ‪٧٢‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ ‪۶۴‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ‪٧٢‬‬
‫ﺭ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ‪١٢٩‬‬
‫ﺭﺗﻮﺵ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪٩۶‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪٣٩‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪٨١‬‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪۵٩ ISO‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ‪١٣٠‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺰﻳﻴﻨﯽ ‪۴٨‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ‪٨٧‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺒﺎ ‪٣٩‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ ‪٣٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺯﻭﻡ ‪٧٧‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺯﻭﻡ ‪١۶‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪٩۵‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۶٨‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪١۵۶‬‬
‫ﺹ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍی ‪١٢٩ AF‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ‪١٢٩‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ ‪١۶‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ‪١٧‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻉ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪٩۵‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪٧٣‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭘﻠﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ ‪۶۵‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ‪۶٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ‪۶۵‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ‪۵٨‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ‪۶۴‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺒﺎ ‪٣٩‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺒﺨﻨﺪ ‪۶۴‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ‪۵٨‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺒﺨﻨﺪ ‪۶۴‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺗﮏ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ‪۶٢‬‬
‫ﻑ‬
‫ﻝ‬
‫ﻥ‬
‫ﻟﺮﺯﺷﮕﻴﺮ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫)‪٣٢ (DIS‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪١٣۵‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭی ‪١۵‬‬
‫ﻕ‬
‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪٩٧‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۵٧‬‬
‫ک‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫ﺟﺎﺯﺩﻥ ‪١٨‬‬
‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ‪١٣٨‬‬
‫ﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺎﮐﺮﻭ ‪۶٠‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﺳﻮﺍﺭ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ‪١۶‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬
‫‪ AF‬ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ ‪۶٢‬‬
‫‪ AF‬ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ‪۶٢‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺗﮏ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ‪۶٢‬‬
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ‪۶٢‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺵ ﭼﺎپ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ‪٩٧‬‬
‫ﮐﺮﻭﺷﻪ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫)‪٧٢ (AEB‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ‪١۴٢‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ‪١٣٢‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻮﺯﺁپ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ‪۵٧‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ‪۵٨‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ‪۵٧‬‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ‪۵٨‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ‪۵٨‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺁﻫﺴﺘﻪ ‪۵٨‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻤﺎی ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ‪٣٨‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﮐﺮﻭ ‪۶٠‬‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪٩۵‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪٧۶‬‬
‫ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪۵۴‬‬
‫ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ‪٨۴‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ‪٨۶‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪٩٨‬‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪٨۵‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ‪٨٩‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪١۴۶‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ‪٣٩‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪١۵٧‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪٨٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪٢٢‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ ‪٢۶‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎی ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ‪١٣٠‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ‪٨٩‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺳﻨﺠﯽ‬
‫ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ ‪٧٠‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻤﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ‪٧٠‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ‪٧٠‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ‪١٣٢‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫ﻭﺏ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪١١٨ AllShare‬‬
‫ﺁﭘﻠﻮﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪١١۵‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ‪١١۵‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ‪٧۶‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ‪٩٠‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۴١‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ‪٩٣‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺵ ‪٩١‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ‪٩١‬‬
‫ی‬
‫‪I‬‬
‫‪١٠١ Intelli-studio‬‬
‫‪M‬‬
‫‪My star‬‬
‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ‪۶۶‬‬
‫ﺭﺩﻩ ﺑﻨﺪی ‪٨٣‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪١٠۵ PictBridge‬‬
‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ‪٩٢‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ‪۵٠‬‬
‫ﻳﺎﺩﮔﻴﺮی ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ ‪٢٢‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪١۵٨‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻭﺵ ﻳﺎ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻦ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﭘﺮﺳﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺘﯽ‬
‫‪ http://www.samsung.com/‬ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
Related documents
Samsung PL121 راهنمای محصول
Samsung PL121 راهنمای محصول
Samsung WB210 راهنمای محصول
Samsung WB210 راهنمای محصول
Samsung ST5000 راهنمای محصول
Samsung ST5000 راهنمای محصول
Samsung ST10 راهنمای محصول
Samsung ST10 راهنمای محصول
Samsung ST64 راهنمای محصول
Samsung ST64 راهنمای محصول
Samsung ST89 راهنمای محصول
Samsung ST89 راهنمای محصول
Samsung PL100 راهنمای محصول
Samsung PL100 راهنمای محصول
Samsung SMART CAMERA WB152F راهنمای محصول
Samsung SMART CAMERA WB152F راهنمای محصول
Samsung SMART CAMERA DV300F راهنمای محصول
Samsung SMART CAMERA DV300F راهنمای محصول
Samsung WB600 راهنمای محصول
Samsung WB600 راهنمای محصول
Samsung PL70 راهنمای محصول
Samsung PL70 راهنمای محصول
Samsung PL170 راهنمای محصول
Samsung PL170 راهنمای محصول
Samsung SMART CAMERA ST1000 راهنمای محصول
Samsung SMART CAMERA ST1000 راهنمای محصول